e-class - mercedes-benz usa · 2021. 3. 12. · e-class cabriolet operator'smanual...

E-ClassCabrioletOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 3862 13 Part no. 207 584 78 02 Edition C 2016

É2075847802{ËÍ2075847802

E-Clas

sCabrio

let

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you can findmore information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a message on themultifunction display/multimedia dis-play.

~ This symbol tells you that you can findfurther information in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.

As at 01.04.2015

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2075847802 É2075847802{ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 3

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22

Introduction ......................................... 24

At a glance ........................................... 32

Safety ................................................... 40

Opening and closing ........................... 73

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 96

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109

Climate control ................................. 117

Driving and parking .......................... 127

On-board computer and displays .... 189

Multimedia system ........................... 234

Stowage and features ...................... 240

Maintenance and care ...................... 257

Breakdown assistance ..................... 270

Wheels and tires ............................... 285

Technical data ................................... 310

2 Contents

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 267Display in the multimedia system .. 176Function/notes ............................. 174

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 203Function/notes ................................ 62Important safety notes .................... 62Warning lamp ................................. 227

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 239

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 121Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 198Display message ............................ 215Function/information .................... 183

Active Driving Assistance package .. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 198Display message ............................ 215Function/information .................... 186

Active Parking AssistDetecting parking spaces .............. 167Display message ............................ 216Exiting a parking space .................. 169Function/notes ............................. 166Important safety notes .................. 166Parking .......................................... 168

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 68Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 66Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ............................. 111Switching on/off ........................... 112

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 315Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Adjusting the volumeAudio 20 ........................................ 235COMAND ....................................... 235

Air bagsDeployment ..................................... 53Display message ............................ 209Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 46Head bag ......................................... 48Important safety notes .................... 45Introduction ..................................... 45Knee bag .......................................... 47Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 41Pelvis air bag ................................... 48Side impact air bag .......................... 47

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 126Important safety notes .................. 126Setting ........................................... 126Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents ............................. 126Setting the side air vents ............... 126Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 102

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRCAPCleaning instructions ..................... 265Extending/retracting ....................... 92Important safety notes .................... 92Installing/removing the windscreen .............................................. 93

AIRSCARFSwitching on/off ........................... 102

AIRSCARF ventsSetting the blower output .............. 126

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71Switching off (ATA) .......................... 71Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 71

Index 3

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 244Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 196Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 196ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 261Hiding a service message .............. 261Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 261Service message ............................ 260Special service requirements ......... 261

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 71Function ........................................... 71Switching off the alarm .................... 71

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ............................. 177

Audio 20Switching on/off ........................... 235

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 211see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 262Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 131Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 131Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 136Automatic drive program ............... 138Changing gear ............................... 136

DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 134Display message ............................ 220Drive program display .................... 134Driving tips .................................... 136Emergency running mode .............. 141Engaging drive position .................. 135Engaging neutral ............................ 135Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 135Engaging reverse gear ................... 135Engaging the park position ............ 134Kickdown ....................................... 137Manual drive program .................... 138Manual drive program (vehicleswith Sports package AMG) ............ 139Overview ........................................ 134Problem (malfunction) ................... 141Program selector button ................ 137Pulling away ................................... 130Starting the engine ........................ 130Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 138Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 134Transmission positions .................. 136

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 141

BBack button ....................................... 235Bag hook ............................................ 242BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 62BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 62BAS PLUSwith Cross-Traffic Assist(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist)

Important safety notes .................... 63Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 76Important safety notes .................... 75Replacing ......................................... 76

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 276Display message ............................ 213Important safety notes .................. 274Jump starting ................................. 278

4 Index

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 198Display message ............................ 215Notes/function .............................. 180see Active Blind Spot Assist

Bluetooth®Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 239Searching for a mobile phone ........ 238see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234Telephony ...................................... 237

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 205Notes ............................................. 315

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 211

BrakesABS .................................................. 62Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS .................................................. 62BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 62Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 315Display message ............................ 203HOLD function ............................... 162Important safety notes .................. 148Maintenance .................................. 149Parking brake ................................ 145Riding tips ...................................... 148Warning lamp ................................. 226

BreakdownWhere will I find...? ........................ 270see Flat tire

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 33Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 25

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Care360° camera ................................. 267AIRCAP .......................................... 265Car wash ........................................ 262Carpets .......................................... 269Display ........................................... 268Exhaust pipe .................................. 267Exterior lights ................................ 266Gear or selector lever .................... 268Interior ........................................... 268Matte finish ................................... 264Notes ............................................. 262Paint .............................................. 263Plastic trim .................................... 268Power washer ................................ 263Rear view camera .......................... 267Roof lining ...................................... 269Seat belt ........................................ 269Seat cover ..................................... 268Sensors ......................................... 267Soft top .......................................... 264Steering wheel ............................... 268Trim pieces .................................... 268Washing by hand ........................... 263Wheels ........................................... 265Wind deflector ............................... 265Wind screen ................................... 265Windows ........................................ 266Wiper blades .................................. 266Wooden trim .................................. 268

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 242CD


CD player (on-board computer) ........ 194Central locking

Automatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 200Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 73

Index 5

Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 114

ChildRestraint system .............................. 58

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 60LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 59On the front-passenger seat ............ 59Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 60

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 57

Cigarette lighter ................................ 245Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 266Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 119Controlling automatically ............... 121Cooling with air dehumidification .. 121Defrosting the windows ................. 124Defrosting the windshield .............. 123Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 118General notes ................................ 117Indicator lamp ................................ 121Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 120Maximum cooling .......................... 123Overview of systems ...................... 117Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 125Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 121Rear control panel ......................... 119Refrigerant ..................................... 317Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 317Setting the air distribution ............. 122Setting the air vents ...................... 126Setting the airflow ......................... 123Setting the climate mode ............... 122Setting the temperature ................ 122Setting the temperature with 3-zone automatic climate control ..... 122Setting the temperaturewith dual-zone automatic climate control ..... 122

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 125Switching on/off ........................... 120Switching residual heat on/off ...... 125Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 124Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 123

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 205Operation/notes .............................. 64

COMANDSwitching on/off ........................... 235

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 268

Combination switch .......................... 110Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 192Controller ........................................... 235Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 259Display message ............................ 212Filling capacity ............................... 316Important safety notes .................. 316Temperature gauge ........................ 189Warning lamp ................................. 230

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 31Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ............................. 111

Cruise controlActivation conditions ..................... 151Cruise control lever ....................... 151Deactivating ................................... 152Display message ............................ 218Driving system ............................... 151Function/notes ............................. 151Important safety notes .................. 151

6 Index

Setting a speed .............................. 152Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 151

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 243Important safety notes .................. 243Rear compartment ......................... 244

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 28Customer Relations Department ....... 28

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataData carrier

Selecting ........................................ 194Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ............................. 109Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199

Declarations of conformity ................. 27Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Interior lighting .............................. 200

Diagnostics connection ...................... 28Digital Operator's Manual

Help ................................................. 22Introduction ..................................... 22

Digital speedometer ......................... 192DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 134Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 260Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 202Driving systems ............................. 214Engine ............................................ 212General notes ................................ 202Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 202KEYLESS-GO .................................. 224Lights ............................................. 211Safety systems .............................. 203SmartKey ....................................... 223Tires ............................................... 219

Vehicle ........................................... 220Distance recorder ............................. 191Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 232Distance warning function

Function/notes ................................ 65DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 155Activation conditions ..................... 155Deactivating ................................... 158Display message ............................ 216Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 158Function/notes ............................. 153Important safety notes .................. 153Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 157Stopping ........................................ 156

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 200Automatic locking (switch) ............... 79Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 73Control panel ................................... 39Display message ............................ 222Emergency locking ........................... 80Emergency unlocking ....................... 80Important safety notes .................... 78Opening (from inside) ...................... 78

Drinking and driving ......................... 147Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 138Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 134Manual ........................................... 138Manual (vehicles with Sportspackage AMG) ............................... 139

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 261

Driving on flooded roads .................. 150Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 68Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 66BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 62BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 62

Index 7

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 64Distance warning function ............... 65EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 68ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 66Important safety information ........... 61Overview .......................................... 61PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 69STEER CONTROL ............................. 71

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 174Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 183Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 186Active Parking Assist ..................... 166ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177Blind Spot Assist ............................ 180Cruise control ................................ 151Display message ............................ 214DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 153DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 160Dynamic handling package withsports mode .................................. 163HOLD function ............................... 162Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 182Lane Tracking package .................. 180PARKTRONIC ................................. 163Rear view camera .......................... 170Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 179

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 136Brakes ........................................... 148Break-in period .............................. 127Downhill gradient ........................... 148Drinking and driving ....................... 147Driving in winter ............................. 150Driving on flooded roads ................ 150Driving on wet roads ...................... 149Exhaust check ............................... 147Fuel ................................................ 146General .......................................... 146Hydroplaning ................................. 149Icy road surfaces ........................... 150

Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 149Snow chains .................................. 287Wet road surface ........................... 148

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 194see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Dynamic handling package withsports mode ....................................... 163

EE10

see FuelEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 200Function/notes ............................. 104

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 105Function/notes ............................. 104Switching on/off ........................... 200

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 204Function/notes ................................ 68

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 147On-board computer ....................... 192

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 131Automatic engine switch-off .......... 131Deactivating/activating ................. 132General information ....................... 131Important safety notes .................. 131Introduction ................................... 131

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56

Emergency closingSoft top ............................................ 87

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 80Trunk ............................................... 82Vehicle ............................................. 80

8 Index

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 308Important safety notes .................. 308Removing ....................................... 309Storage location ............................ 309Stowing .......................................... 309Technical data ............................... 308

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 53

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 25

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 230Display message ............................ 212ECO start/stop function ................ 131Engine number ............................... 312Irregular running ............................ 133Jump-starting ................................. 278Starting problems .......................... 133Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 130Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 130Switching off .................................. 145Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 282

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 133

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 259Additives ........................................ 315Checking the oil level ..................... 258Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 258Display message ............................ 213Filling capacity ............................... 315Notes about oil grades ................... 315Notes on oil level/consumption .... 258

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Characteristics ................................. 67Deactivating/activating ................. 196Deactivating/activating (notes) ....... 67Display message ............................ 203Function/notes ................................ 66

General notes .................................. 66Important safety information ........... 67Trailer stabilization ........................... 68Warning lamp ................................. 227

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 67Exhaust check ................................... 147Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 267Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 109see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 105Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 201Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 106Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 106Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 106Setting ........................................... 106Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 108Storing the parking position .......... 107

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 236Filler cap

see RefuelingFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 270Preparing the vehicle ..................... 270TIREFIT kit ...................................... 271see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 255Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 310Two-way radio ................................ 310

FuelConsumption statistics .................. 192Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 192Displaying the range ...................... 192Driving tips .................................... 146Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 314Fuel gauge ....................................... 33

Index 9

Grade (gasoline) ............................ 313Important safety notes .................. 313Problem (malfunction) ................... 144Refueling ........................................ 141Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 313

Fuel filler flapOpening ......................................... 142

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 192

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 313Problem (malfunction) ................... 144

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 270Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 283Before changing ............................. 283Dashboard fuse box ....................... 283Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 283Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 284Important safety notes .................. 282

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 255General notes ................................ 252Important safety notes .................. 253Opening/closing the garage door .. 255Problems when programming ........ 255Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 253Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 254

Gasoline ............................................. 313Genuine parts ...................................... 24Glove box ........................................... 241Google™ Local Search


HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 111

Head bagsDisplay message ............................ 208Operation ......................................... 48

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 102Head restraint

Lowering manually (rear) ................. 98Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 98Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98see NECK-PRO head restraints

HeadlampsFogging up ..................................... 112see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................. 110High-beam headlamps

Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 111Changing bulbs .............................. 114Display message ............................ 211Switching on/off ........................... 110

Hill start assist .................................. 130HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 162Deactivating ................................... 162Display message ............................ 214Function/notes ............................. 162

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

HoodClosing ........................................... 258Display message ............................ 222Important safety notes .................. 257Opening ......................................... 257

Horn ...................................................... 32Hydroplaning ..................................... 149

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 71Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 232

10 Index

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 33Settings ......................................... 198Warning and indicator lamps ........... 33

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 199Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 113Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 200Overview ........................................ 113Reading lamp ................................. 113Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 199

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

JJack

Storage location ............................ 270Using ............................................. 305

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 278

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 128SmartKey ....................................... 128

KEYLESS-GODeactivation ..................................... 73Display message ............................ 224Locking ............................................ 73Removing the Start/Stop button ... 129Start/Stop button .......................... 128Starting the engine ........................ 130Unlocking ......................................... 73

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 137Manual drive program .................... 140

Knee bag .............................................. 47

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 198Display message ............................ 215Function/information .................... 182

Lane Tracking package ..................... 180LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 59License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 211Light function, active

Display message ............................ 211Light sensor (display message) ....... 211Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 200Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 111Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109Cornering light function ................. 111Hazard warning lamps ................... 111High beam flasher .......................... 110High-beam headlamps ................... 110Light switch ................................... 109Low-beam headlamps .................... 110Parking lamps ................................ 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 110Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 199Standing lamps .............................. 110Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 199Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 199Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 199Turn signals ................................... 110see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Loading guidelines ............................ 240Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 79

Index 11

Emergency locking ........................... 80From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 79

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 200Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 211Switching on/off ........................... 110

Luggage coversee Trunk partition

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100

MM+S tires ............................................ 287Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 264mbrace

Call priority .................................... 249Display message ............................ 205Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 249Downloading routes ....................... 252Emergency call .............................. 247General notes ................................ 246Geo fencing ................................... 252Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 251MB info call button ........................ 248Remote fault diagnosis .................. 251Remote vehicle locking .................. 251Roadside Assistance button .......... 248Search & Send ............................... 250Self-test ......................................... 246Speed alert .................................... 252System .......................................... 246Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 252Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 250

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 75General notes .................................. 75Inserting .......................................... 75Locking vehicle ................................ 80

Removing ......................................... 75Unlocking the driver's door .............. 80

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 241see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 194Memory function ............................... 108Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 174Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 183Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 186Active Parking Assist ..................... 166ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 177Blind Spot Assist ............................ 180Cruise control ................................ 151DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 153DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 160General notes ................................ 150Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 182PARKTRONIC ................................. 163PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 55PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 56Rear view camera .......................... 170Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 179

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 202Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 237Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 239Frequencies ................................... 310Installation ..................................... 310Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195Transmission output (maximum) .... 310

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 74

12 Index

MOExtended tires .............................. 270Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 307Mounting a new wheel ................... 306Preparing the vehicle ..................... 304Raising the vehicle ......................... 305Removing a wheel .......................... 306Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 304

MP3Operation ....................................... 194see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Multicontour seatAdjusting (on the seat) .................. 100

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 191Permanent display ......................... 198

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 190Overview .......................................... 34

Multimedia systemsee Separate operating instructions

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 193see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

NECK-PRO head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 54Operation ......................................... 55Resetting triggered .......................... 55

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 127

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Occupant safetyAir bags ........................................... 45Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 56Children in the vehicle ..................... 57Important safety notes .................... 40Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 40Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 48PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 41Pets in the vehicle ........................... 61PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 55PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 56Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40

OCSConditions ....................................... 49Faults ............................................... 52Operation ......................................... 49System self-test ............................... 51

Odometer ........................................... 191Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

Assistance menu ........................... 196Audio menu ................................... 194Convenience submenu .................. 200Display messages .......................... 202Displaying a service message ........ 261DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 158Factory settings submenu ............. 201Important safety notes .................. 189Instrument cluster submenu .......... 198Lighting submenu .......................... 199Menu overview .............................. 191Message memory .......................... 202Navigation menu ............................ 193Operation ....................................... 190Service menu ................................. 198Settings menu ............................... 198Standard display ............................ 191Telephone menu ............................ 195Trip menu ...................................... 191Vehicle submenu ........................... 200

Index 13

Video DVD operation ..................... 194Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 27Important safety notes .................... 27

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 22

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 25

Outside temperature display ........... 189Overhead control panel ...................... 38Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 61

PPaint code number ............................ 311Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 263Panic alarm .......................................... 40Parking

Important safety notes .................. 144Parking brake ................................ 145Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 107Rear view camera .......................... 170see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 166see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 204Notes/function .............................. 145Warning lamp ................................. 226

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 110

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 165Driving system ............................... 163Function/notes ............................. 163Important safety notes .................. 163Problem (malfunction) ................... 166Range of the sensors ..................... 164Warning display ............................. 165

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 209

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 41Problems (malfunctions) ................ 209

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 61Phone book


Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 268Power washers .................................. 263Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 205Operation ......................................... 55

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 206Function/notes ................................ 69Important safety notes .................... 69Warning lamp ................................. 232

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)


Program selector button .................. 137Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 71Immobilizer ...................................... 71

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 24

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 130General notes ................................ 130

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 29

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 28

14 Index

RRadio

Selecting a station ......................... 194see separate operating instructions

Radio modesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 27Reading lamp ..................................... 113Rear compartment

Setting the temperature ................ 122Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 211Switching on/off ........................... 110

Rear seatsDisplay message ............................ 222

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 267Display in the multimedia system .. 171Function/notes ............................. 170Switching on/off ........................... 171

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 125Switching on/off ........................... 124

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 105Dipping (automatic) ....................... 106

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 317Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Important safety notes .................. 141Refueling process .......................... 142see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 252Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 253

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 113Overview of bulb types .................. 114

Reporting safety defects .................... 28Rescue card ......................................... 29

Reserve (fuel tank)see Fuel

Reserve fuelDisplay message ............................ 213Warning lamp ................................. 230see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 125Restraint system

Display message ............................ 207Introduction ..................................... 40Problem (malfunction) ................... 229Warning lamp (function) ................... 40

Reversing featureSide windows ................................... 82

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 211Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26Roll bar


RoofOverview .......................................... 85see Soft top

Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 269Roof load (maximum) ........................ 317Route guidance


SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 57see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD memory cardEjecting .......................................... 239Inserting ........................................ 239Inserting/removing ........................ 239see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234Selecting ........................................ 194

Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Index 15

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 45Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 44Cleaning ......................................... 269Correct usage .................................. 43Fastening ......................................... 43Important safety guidelines ............. 42Introduction ..................................... 41Releasing ......................................... 44Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 201Warning lamp ................................. 225Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 97Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 100Adjusting the head restraint ............ 98Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 100Cleaning the cover ......................... 268Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Folding the backrests forward/back ................................................. 99Important safety notes .................... 96Overview .......................................... 96Seat backrest display message ..... 222Seat heating .................................. 100Seat heating problem .................... 102Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 108Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 102Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100Switching seat ventilation on/off .................................................. 101

SectionTrunk ............................................... 80

Securing cargo .................................. 242Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 268Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 267Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 198Service message

see ASSYST PLUSService products

Brake fluid ..................................... 315Coolant (engine) ............................ 316

Engine oil ....................................... 315Fuel ................................................ 313Important safety notes .................. 312Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 317Washer fluid ................................... 316

Setting the air distribution ............... 122Setting the airflow ............................ 123Setting the date/time format


Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 201On-board computer ....................... 198

Side impact air bag ............................. 47Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 211Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 266Important safety information ........... 82Opening/closing .............................. 83Opening/closing (all) ....................... 83Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85Resetting ......................................... 84Reversing feature ............................. 82

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 76Changing the programming ............. 74Checking the battery ....................... 76Display message ............................ 223Door central locking/unlocking ....... 73Important safety notes .................... 73Loss ................................................. 77Mechanical key ................................ 75Opening/closing soft top ................. 87Overview .......................................... 73Positions (ignition lock) ................. 128Problem (malfunction) ..................... 77Starting the engine ........................ 130

16 Index

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

Snow chains ...................................... 287Sockets

General notes ................................ 245Rear compartment ......................... 246

Soft topAIRCAP ............................................ 92Cleaning ......................................... 264Closing manually in an emer-gency ............................................... 87Display message ............................ 223Important safety notes .................... 85Installing/removing the AIRCAPwind screen ..................................... 93Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 87Opening/closing (with soft-topswitch) ............................................. 86Problem (malfunction) ..................... 95Relocking ......................................... 91wind screen ..................................... 91

Soft-top switch .................................... 86Sound

Switching on/off ........................... 235Special seat belt retractor .................. 57Specialist workshop ............................ 28Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 192In the Instrument cluster ................. 33Segments ...................................... 189Selecting the display unit ............... 198

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 211Switching on/off ........................... 110

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 129STEER CONTROL .................................. 71Steering

Display message ............................ 222Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Activating/deactivating ................. 197Display message ............................ 218

Steering assistant STEER CON-TROL

see STEER CONTROLSteering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 103Button overview ............................... 34Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 190Cleaning ......................................... 268Important safety notes .................. 102Paddle shifters ............................... 138Steering wheel heating .................. 103Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 108

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 104Switching on/off ........................... 103

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 138Stowage areas ................................... 240Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 241Center console .............................. 241Cup holders ................................... 243Glove box ....................................... 241Important safety information ......... 240Stowage net ................................... 242Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 241

Stowage net ....................................... 242Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 243Summer tires ..................................... 287Sun visor ............................................ 244Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 199Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 125Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 239

TTachometer ........................................ 189Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 211Tank

see Fuel tankTank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33

Index 17

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 312Emergency spare wheel ................. 308Information .................................... 310Tires/wheels ................................. 307Vehicle data ................................... 317

TelephoneAccepting a call (multifunctionsteering wheel) .............................. 195Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 238Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 237Display message ............................ 222Menu (on-board computer) ............ 195Number from the phone book ........ 195Redialing ........................................ 196Rejecting/ending a call ................. 195see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 239

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 189Outside temperature ...................... 189Setting (climate control) ................ 122

Through-loading feature ................... 242Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 291Checking manually ........................ 291Display message ............................ 219Maximum ....................................... 291Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 273Notes ............................................. 290Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 273Recommended ............................... 288

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 293Function/notes ............................. 291General notes ................................ 291Important safety notes .................. 292Restarting ...................................... 293Warning lamp ................................. 233Warning message .......................... 293

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 270TIREFIT kit .......................................... 271

Important safety notes .................. 271

Tire pressure not reached .............. 273Tire pressure reached .................... 273

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 302Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 301Bar (definition) ............................... 301Changing a wheel .......................... 303Characteristics .............................. 301Checking ........................................ 285Curb weight (definition) ................. 302Definition of terms ......................... 301Direction of rotation ...................... 304Display message ............................ 219Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 303DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 301DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 301GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 302GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 302GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 302Important safety notes .................. 285Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 302Information on driving .................... 285Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 302Labeling (overview) ........................ 298Load bearing index (definition) ...... 303Load index ..................................... 300Load index (definition) ................... 302Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 302Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 302Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 302Maximum tire load ......................... 300Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 302MOExtended tires .......................... 287Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 303PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 302

18 Index

Replacing ....................................... 303Service life ..................................... 286Sidewall (definition) ....................... 303Speed rating (definition) ................ 302Storing ........................................... 304Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 301Temperature .................................. 298TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 303Tire bead (definition) ...................... 303Tire pressure (definition) ................ 303Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 302Tire size (data) ............................... 307Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 298Tire tread ....................................... 286Tire tread (definition) ..................... 303Total load limit (definition) ............. 303Traction ......................................... 297Traction (definition) ....................... 303Tread wear ..................................... 297Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 297Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 301Wear indicator (definition) ............. 303Wheel and tire combination ........... 307Wheel rim (definition) .................... 302see Flat tire

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 282Important safety notes .................. 280

Towing a trailerESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 68

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 280Installing the towing eye ................ 281Removing the towing eye ............... 281Transporting the vehicle ................ 282With both axles on the ground ....... 281With the rear axle raised ................ 282

Towing eye ......................................... 270Traffic reports


Traffic Sign AssistDisplay message ............................ 214Function/notes ............................. 179Important safety notes .................. 179Instrument cluster display ............. 179

Transfer case ..................................... 141Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 134Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 134Transporting the vehicle .................. 282Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 268Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 192Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 191Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 192

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 81Important safety notes .................... 80Locking separately ........................... 81Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 81Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 80

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 222Opening dimensions ...................... 317

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 317Trunk partition

Display message ............................ 222General notes .................................. 91Opening/closing .............................. 91

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 211Switching on/off ........................... 110

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 310Installation ..................................... 310Transmission output (maximum) .... 310

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

Index 19

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 80From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 79

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 239

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 244Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 28Data acquisition ............................... 29Display message ............................ 220Equipment ....................................... 25Individual settings .......................... 198Limited Warranty ............................. 29Loading .......................................... 294Locking (in an emergency) ............... 80Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 73Lowering ........................................ 307Maintenance .................................... 26Parking for a long period ................ 146Pulling away ................................... 130Raising ........................................... 305Reporting problems ......................... 28Securing from rolling away ............ 304Towing away .................................. 280Transporting .................................. 282Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 80Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 73Vehicle data ................................... 317

Vehicle data ....................................... 317Vehicle dimensions ........................... 317Vehicle emergency locking ................ 80Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 311Vehicle tool kit .................................. 270Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 194see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 234

VINSeat ............................................... 312

Type plate ...................................... 311Voice Control System

see Separate operating instructions

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 227Brakes ........................................... 226Check Engine ................................. 230Coolant .......................................... 230Distance warning ........................... 232ESP® .............................................. 227ESP® OFF ....................................... 228Fuel tank ........................................ 230General notes ................................ 224Overview .......................................... 33PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 41Reserve fuel ................................... 230Restraint system ............................ 229Seat belt ........................................ 225Tire pressure monitor .................... 233

Warranty .............................................. 25Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 223Wheel and tire combinations

Tires ............................................... 307Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 307Wheel chock ...................................... 304Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 303Checking ........................................ 285Cleaning ......................................... 265Emergency spare wheel ................. 308Important safety notes .................. 285Information on driving .................... 285Interchanging/changing ................ 303Mounting a new wheel ................... 306Mounting a wheel .......................... 304Removing a wheel .......................... 306Storing ........................................... 304Tightening torque ........................... 307Wheel size/tire size ....................... 307

Wind deflector (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 265Wind screen ......................................... 91Wind screen (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 265

20 Index

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 123

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 260Important safety notes .................. 316

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 116Replacing the wiper blades ............ 115Switching on/off ........................... 114

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 287Slippery road surfaces ................... 150Snow chains .................................. 287

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 287

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 266Important safety notes .................. 115Replacing ....................................... 115

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 268Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 123

Index 21

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual additionallydescribes further functions and equipmentinstalled in your vehicle. The functions of thevehicle and multimedia system are described inthe Digital Operator's Manual. You can call uptheDigital Operator'sManual via themultimediasystem.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters. Furtherinformation can be found in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND"section under the "Character entry (teleph-ony)" keyword.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button in the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 235).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forwards/backwards: turn3the controller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information texts or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

22 Digital Operator's Manual

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

Digital Operator's Manual 23

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

24 Genuine Mercedes-Benz partsIntroductio

n

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 311).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-

tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction

results in a condition that is likely to causedeath or serious bodily injury if the vehicle isdriven, that defect or malfunction has beensubject to repair two ormore times, and you

Service and vehicle operation 25

Introductio

n

Z

have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC in writing of the need for its repair.

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunctionof a less serious nature than category (1)has been subject to repair four or moretimes and you have directly notifiedMercedes-Benz in writing of the need for itsrepair.

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

26 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Operating safety 27

Introductio

n

Z

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.

Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again witha Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one ofthe following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:

28 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Act of1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/

content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rvehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assurance

Data stored in the vehicle 29

Introductio

n

Z

The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which acci-dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-dent location) are recorded. However, other par-ties, such as law enforcement could combineEDR data with the type of personally identifyingdata routinely acquired during a crash investi-gation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by the EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.

30 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Information on copyright 31

Introductio

n

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 138

; Combination switch 110

= Instrument cluster 33

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 134

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 163

C Overhead control panel 38

D Climate control systems 117

E Ignition lock 128Start/Stop button 128

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheel 102Steering wheel heating 103

G Cruise control lever 151

H Parking brake 145

I Diagnostics connection 28

J Opens the hood 257

K Releases the parking brake 145

L Light switch 109

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Fuel gauge (left)Coolant temperature (right) 189Warning and indicator lamps:÷ ESP® 227· Distance warning 232å ESP® OFF 227# Turn signal, left 110? Coolant 230K High-beam headlamps 110L Low-beam headlamps 110T Parking lamps 110R This lamp has no func-tion 1108 Reserve fuel 230Fuel filler flap location indi-cator: the fuel filler cap is onthe right-hand side.

Function Page

; Speedometer with segments 189

= Multifunction display 191

? Tachometer 189Warning and indicator lamps:$ Brakes (USA only) 226J Brakes (Canada only) 226# Turn signal, right 110! ABS 2276 Restraint system 40; Check Engine 230h Tire pressure monitor 233ü Seat belts 225

Information on the display of the outside tem-perature in the multifunction display can befound under "Outside temperature display"(Y page 189).Set the lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle interiorusing the on-board computer (Y page 199).

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 191

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 195Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function Page

A =;

Selects a menu 1909:

Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough lists 190a

Confirms a selection 190Hides display messages 202

B %

Back 190Switches off voice-operatednavigation or the Voice Con-trol System

i In vehicles with the COMAND multimediasystem you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

34 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

i In vehicles with the Audio 20 multimediasystem you can find further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the voice-operated control of the navi-gation in the manufacturer's operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Multimedia system (see theseparate operating instruc-tions)

; c Seat heating 100

= s Seat ventilation 101

? Ò AIRSCARF 102

A ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion 131

Function Page

B £ Hazard warning lamps 111

C 4 5 Indicator lamp 49

D ATA indicator lamp 71

E Moves the seat-belt extenderforwards 43

F Ò AIRSCARF 102

36 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

G Cup holder 243

H Stowage compartment 240Cup holder 243

I à Dynamic handlingpackage with sports mode 163

J c PARKTRONIC 163

K AIRCAP 93

L Opens and closes the sidewindows 82

M Opens and closes the softtop 85

Function Page

N Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 241

O Ü Retracts the rear seathead restraints 98

P Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 137

Q Multimedia system control-ler (see the separate operat-ing instructions)

Center console 37

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 113

; |Switches the automaticinterior lighting controlon/off 113

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 113

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 248

A G SOS button (mbracesystem) 247

B Rear-view mirror 106

C Buttons for the garage dooropener 253

Function Page

D Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and Voice ControlSystem (see the separateoperating instructions)

E F Breakdown assistancecall button (mbrace system) 248

F p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 113

G c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on/off 113

38 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringwheel 108

; Adjusts the seats electrically 97

= %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 79

? Opens the door 78

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 105

Function Page

B W Opens/closes the sidewindows 83

C n Activates/deactivatesthe override feature for theside windows in the rearcompartment 61

D o Opens the trunk lid 81

Door control panel 39

Ataglance

Panic alarm

X To activate: press the! button: forapproximately one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press the! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.Furthermore, the restraint system may alsoreduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu-pants when an accident occurs.The restraint system includes:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can only offerthe intended level of protection if all vehicleoccupants:Rare correctly wearing their seat belts.(Y page 43)Radjust their seat and head restraint properly(Y page 96).

The driver is also responsible for ensuring thatthe steering wheel has been correctly posi-tioned. Observe the information relating to thecorrect driver's seat position (Y page 96).Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly ifdeployed (Y page 45).An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if the protection already provided by a cor-rectly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bagsare not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bagsthat would increase the degree of protectionafforded to the vehicle occupants in the event ofan accident are deployed. Seat belts and airbags generally do not protect against objectspenetrating the vehicle from the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 53).See “Children in the vehicle” for information onchildren traveling with you as well as vehiclerestraint systems (Y page 57).


G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and at

40 Occupant safetySafety

regular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: ispart of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Ris not lit: the front-passenger front air bag isenabled. If, in the event of an accident, alldeployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed.

Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, be sure to observethe notes on the "Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There youwill also find instructions on rearward andforward-facing child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the classi-fication of the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-bled or deactivated (Y page 48). Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 41) and "Air bags"(Y page 45). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seat beltsand the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled by the seat belt extenderquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,do not engage the seat belt tongue in thebuckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and front-passengerfront air bagmay be triggered andwould needto be replaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-

ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57) in addition to the child restraint


system manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 48)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Proper use of the seat beltsPay attention to the safety notes about the seatbelt (Y page 42).All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat beltcorrectly before setting off. Make sure that alloccupants are wearing their seat belts correctlyfor the entire journey.When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the beltbuckle that belongs to the seat.RThe seat belt is tightened across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.RThe seat belt is not twisted.

Only then can the forces produced in theevent of an accident be evenly distributedacross the belt.RThe shoulder section of the belt must alwaysbe routed across the center of the shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt should notcome into contact with your neck and mustnot be routed under the arm.RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-sible over your lap.The lap belt must always pass across your hipjoints and never across your stomach orabdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can bepushed down across the hip joints and pulledtight using the shoulder section.RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointedor fragile objects.If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g.eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these itemsin a more suitable location.ROnly one person should use each seat belt atany one time.On no account should babies or childrentravel sitting on the lap of another vehicleoccupant. During an accident, they could becrushed between the occupant and seat belt.RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if theseat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’soccupants.Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g.cushions, between the occupant and the seat.

Seat belts are solely intended for the protectionand restraint of the vehicle occupants. Tosecure objects, luggage or loads, alwaysobserve the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 240).

Fastening a seat beltObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 43).

G WARNINGIf the seat-belt extender is extended duringthe journey, the seat belt is not fitted properlyon the body. The seat belt can then no longerperform its intended protective function. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Always make sure that the seat-belt extenderis retracted during a journey.

The seat-belt extender for the driver and frontpassenger helps you fasten your seat belt. Seat-belt extender= is extended when the respec-tive door is closed and the SmartKey is turned toposition 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

You can also extend seat-belt extender= withseat-belt extender button?.X Press seat-belt extender button?.Seat-belt extender= extends.

Seat-belt extender= is retracted again if:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the seat beltbuckle.Rthe belt tongue is not engaged in the seat beltbuckle within 60 seconds.Rthe respective door is opened.Rthe SmartKey is turned to position 0 in theignition lock.Ryou release the seat backrest and fold it for-wards.Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied afterapproximately five seconds.If you press seat-belt extender button? afterthis, seat-belt extender= will not extend.

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 96).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of seat-beltextender= and engage belt tongue; intobelt buckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightened auto-matically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 45).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

In order to attach the child restraint systemsecurely in the vehicle, the seat belts in the rearare equipped with a special seat belt retractor.Further information can be found under "Specialseat belt retractor" (Y page 57).

Automatic comfort-install featureThe front seat belts have an automatic comfort-install feature. The automatic comfort-fit featurereduces the retraction force of the seat belts.The seat belts are thus routedmore comfortablyfor the driver and front passenger.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts


can no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This func-tion adjusts the driver's and front-passengerseat belt to the upper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle whenthe seat-belt extender is retracted andRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detected betweenthe vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do nothold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-ing.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 201).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with

increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until thedriver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

i More information on the 7 seat beltwarning lamp can be found under "Warningand indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belt" (Y page 225).

Air bags

IntroductionThe air bag installation point is identified by thelabel AIR BAG.An air bag supplements a correctly fastenedseat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-tional protection in the event of an accident.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thevarious air bag systems work independently ofeach other (Y page 53).There is, however, no system available todaythat can completely rule out injury or death.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 41).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 48) and on "Children in thevehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationand operating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.

Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags


Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 41).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied (Y page 48)Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up (Y page 49)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steeringcolumn. The driver's knee bag is triggeredtogether with the front air bag.The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh,knee and lower leg protection for the occupantin the driver's seat.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outer bol-ster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passengerside (front) deploys under the following condi-tions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckleof the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the side impact air bag on the front-passengerside deploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Head bags

Head bags: deploy in the area of the side win-dows at the front.When deployed, the headbag enhances the levelof protection for the head. However, it does notprotect the:RchestRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the headbag isdeployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a headbag may be deployed in otheraccident situations (Y page 53).The headbag on the front-passenger side doesnot deploy under the following conditions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the headbag on the front-passenger sidedeploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Pelvis air bags: deploy below next to the outerseat cushions.When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances thelevel of protection of the vehicle occupants onthe side of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of theimpact.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidedoes not deploy under the following conditions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidedeploys if an appropriate accident situationoccurs. In this case, deployment is independentof whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.Depending on that result, the front-passengerfront air bag is either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices


PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with their backagainst the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possibleIf the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-tion, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat, besure to observe the correct positioning of thechild restraint system. Never place objectsunder or behind the child restraint system, e.g.cushions. The entire base of the child restraintsystem must always rest on the seat cushion ofthe front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint systemmust lie asflat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint system must not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp:indicates whether the front-passenger front airbag is disabled.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock, or in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,press the start/stop button once or twice.The system carries out a self-diagnosis test.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for about six seconds.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampthen shows the status of the front-passengerfront air bag. If the status of the front-passengerfront air bag changes whilst the vehicle is inmotion, an air bag display message may appearin the instrument cluster (Y page 209). Alwaysobserve the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp when the front-passenger seat is occu-pied. Make sure that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct before andduring a journey.If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp:Rlights up, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Rdoes not light up, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled. If, in the case of an acci-dent, all deployment criteria are met, thefront-passenger front air bag is deployed.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehicleseat-belt extender to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the retracted vehicle seat-beltextender. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observethe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

If OCS detects that:Rthe front-passenger seat is not occupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up continuously after the system's self-diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild aged up to twelve months in a standardchild restraint system, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continu-ously after the system's self-diagnosis test.This indicates that the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.In the case of a twelve-month-old child in astandard child restraint system, thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lampmaygo out after the system's self-diagnosis test.This indicates that the front-passenger frontair bag is activated. Categorization is depend-ent on the type of child restraint system andthe stature of the child, for example. In thiscase, always install the child restraint systemon a suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or asmall adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp lights up continuously or goesoff after the system's self-diagnosis testdepending on the categorization.- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is off, position the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alternatively, aperson of smaller stature can sit on a rearseat.

- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up, a person of smaller statureshould not sit on the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of an appropriate size, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out after the system's self-diagnosistest. This indicates that the front-passengerfront air bag is activated.

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure toobserve the notes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 57).If the OCS is malfunctioning, both the red 6restraint systemwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp light up simultaneously. In this case,the front-passenger air bag is deactivated anddoes not deploy during an accident. Have thesystem checked by qualified technicians as


soon as possible. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Only have the front-passenger seat repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or theseat cushion are damaged, have the necessaryrepair work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessories thathave been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bag willalso deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on thefront-passenger seat. Depending on the result,the front-passenger air bag is activated or deac-tivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light up during the system self-test, then the system is malfunctioning. Thefront-passenger front air bag might be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident withhigh deceleration. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-

board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedas far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status ofthe front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49).For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-lems with the Occupant Classification System"(Y page 52).

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamplights up and remains lit,even though the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or a per-son of a stature corre-sponding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-rect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the personon the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49).

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up and/ordoes not stay on.The front-passenger seatis:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child up totwelve months old in achild restraint system

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests onthe seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of theforward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seatbelt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passengerseat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the childrestraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the childrestraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-ingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto theseat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It isrecommended that you install the child restraint system on a suit-able rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Roll bar

G DANGERIf the roll bar has developed a malfunction, itmay not function, e.g. in the event of an acci-dent. The roll bars may then not protect thevehicle occupants as intended. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have roll bars checked immediately at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNINGRisk of injury if the roll bar is triggered.Ensure that the movement area of the rearhead restraints is kept clear.

The roll bars are under the rear head restraints.They extend if systems detect that the vehicle isin danger of rollover. Thus the rear headrestraints also extend automatically.Once the roll bars are extended, you can no lon-ger lower the rear head restraints. An open soft


top can no longer be closed. In this case, visitthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags


G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trig-ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardoussituations. This procedure is reversible.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also be

released. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicleimmediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 40)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRHead bag, if the system determines thatdeployment can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

The front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 41).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. Duringthe first deployment stage, the front air bag isfilled with propellant gas to reduce the risk ofinjuries. The front air bag is fully deployed withthe maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-ond deployment threshold is reached within afew milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag on theside of impact, independently of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and the use of the

seat belt on the driver's seat and in the rearcompartment seatsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags and pelvis air bags are not deployedThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the fol-lowing conditions:- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RHead bag on the side of impact, independ-ently of the use of the seat belt and inde-pendently of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRHead bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when thevehicle rolls over, if the system determinesthat deployment can offer additional protec-tion to that provided by the seat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

NECK-PRO head restraints


G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger other


vehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likelihoodof head and chest injuries. The NECK-PRO headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards in theevent of a rear-end collision of a certain severity.This provides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been trig-gered in an accident, you must reset the NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger seat (Y page 55). Otherwise, theadditional protection will not be available in theevent of another rear-end collision. You can rec-ognize when NECK-PRO head restraints havebeen triggered by the fact that they have movedforwards and can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have theNECK-PRO head restraints checked for func-tionality at a qualified specialist workshop aftera rear-end collision.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints

Donot insert your finger between the upholsteryof the head restraint and the seat. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction of arrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow= untilthe cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have difficultyresetting theNECK-PRO head restraints, havethis work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

IntroductionIn certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehi-cle occupants.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dangerthat the seats and/or objects could be dam-aged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of anaccident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-steers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is inan unfavorable position.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

Rif the vehicle skids, the front side windows areclosed.Rthe air pressure in the side bolsters of the seatbackrests of the front multicontour seats israised.

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the beltpre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontourseats, the air pressure in the side bolsters isreduced again. All settings made by PRE-SAFE®can then be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightlywhen the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Informa-tion about the convenience function can befound under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 45).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

IntroductionPRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-endcollision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-uations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptivemeasures to protect the vehicle occupants.

Important safety notesThe intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interventionof PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-cle is backing up.When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-ing space with assistance from Active ParkingAssist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply thebrakes.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seat beltsare pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if the driverapplies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is can-celed:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when agear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no longerdetectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention topull away

If the hazardous situation passes without result-ing in an accident, the original settings arerestored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRvehicles with a memory function: the electri-cally adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall


Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant classification system(OCS)" (Y page 48)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-

dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 43).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the front seat belt smoothly out of theseat-belt extender and the rear seat belt outof the belt outlet.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back tothe seat-belt extender in the front and the beltoutlet in the rear.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system is

always resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 240).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observe theinformation on the "Occupant Classification

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

System (OCS)" (Y page 48). There you will alsofind information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: are loca-ted between the seat cushion and the seat back-rest.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems are installed on the left and right of therear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 48).

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible. The entire base of the childrestraint system must always rest on the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat. The back-rest of the child restraint system must lie as flatas possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint systemmustnot touch the roof or be subjected to a load bythe head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest and the head restraint position accord-ingly. Always make sure that the shoulder beltstrap is correctly routed from the seat-beltextender of the front-passenger seat to theshoulder belt guide on the child restraint sys-tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-wards from the retracted seat-belt extender forthe front-passenger seat.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Child-proof locks


G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for the rear side windows(Y page 61).


G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp: is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.

As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 62)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 62)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 64)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 66)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 68)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 68)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 71)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road and

Driving safety systems 61

Safety

Z

weather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Please pay special attention to thenotes on tires, recommended minimum tiretread depths, etc. (Y page 285).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 227) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 203).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.


G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist

General informationBAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of acollision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS

62 Driving safety systemsSafety

PLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 61).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with theDriving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a camerasystem, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typicalcharacteristics such as the body contours andposture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera systemis malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions arerestricted or no longer available. The brake sys-tem is still available with complete brake boost-ing effect and BAS.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" section(Y page 63).


G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in thesecases. There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly move into the radar sensorsystem detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialist


Safety

Z

workshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BASPLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres-sure will be carried out at the last possiblemoment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the trafficsituation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front within aspeed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobstacles crossing your path, which move inthe detection range of the sensors and arerecognized by them

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-ing force, preventative passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simulta-neously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS consistsof a distance warning function with an autono-mous braking function and adaptive BrakeAssist.COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS can helpyou to minimize the risk of a front-end collisionwith a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects ofsuch a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbewarned visually and acoustically. If you do notreact to the visual and audible collision warning,autonomous braking can be initiated in criticalsituations. If you apply the brake yourself in acritical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 127).

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensor checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.


Activating/deactivatingThe COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isautomatically active after switching on the igni-tion.You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-puter (Y page 197). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distance warning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision with avehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such acollision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warning

There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound, and the·distance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the system to display a warning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-ded period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), thedistance warning function can also react to sta-tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parkedvehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distance warn-ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with theautonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criticaldriving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentThe autonomous braking function is available inthe following speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-tion to intervene.


Safety

Z

If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

Adaptive Brake Assist

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-tance warning signal can detect obstacles thatare in the path of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates thebraking force necessary to avoid a collision. Ifyou apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive BrakeAssist will automatically increase the brakingforce to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speeds above4mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technologyto assess the traffic situation.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable ofreacting to moving objects that have alreadybeen detected as such at least once over theperiod of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-tionary obstacles.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activatedsimultaneously (Y page 55).X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-cle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.


G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving conditionsmay also cause Brake Assist to intervene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to amalfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with full brakeboosting effect and BAS.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.


ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)ETS traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes on ESP®(Y page 282).If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, then ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp and the åESP® OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 227) and display messages which maybe shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 203).

i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.

If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status. Exam-ple: if ESP® was deactivated before the enginewas switched off, ESP® remains deactivatedwhen the engine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesYou can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle ifthe vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts tospin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.


Safety

Z

Deactivating/activating ESP®You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer (Y page 196).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction for better traction on loose surfaces.RTraction control is still activated.RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longeravailable; nor is it activated if you brake firmlywith assistance from ESP®.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP® inter-venes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it isalso not activated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

ESP® trailer stabilization

General informationIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-

ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speedsof about 65 km/h.ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or disabled because of amalfunc-tion.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.


G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 227) as well as displaymessages (Y page 204).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 61).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety andoffers increased braking comfort. In addition to


the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also hasthe HOLD function (Y page 162) and hill startassist (Y page 130).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationPRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize therisk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE®Brake has detected a riskof collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically as well as by automatic braking.

i Pay attention to the important safety notesin the "Driving safety systems" section(Y page 61).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance Plus package.For PRE-SAFE®Brake to assist youwhen driving,the radar sensor system and the camera systemmust be switched on and be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system and thecamera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detectobstacles that are in front of your vehicle for anextended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-cle can be detected.PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standing upright.

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 69).


G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.

Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

In the event of a partial application of the brakes,the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the fullbraking pressure.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify people, especially if they are moving. Inthese cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot inter-vene. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you.

In order to maintain the appropriate distance tothe vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.


Safety

Z

Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system is alsoimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle is traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is coveredRglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sunbeing low in the skyRdarknessRor if:

- pedestriansmove quickly, e.g. into the pathof the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizes apedestrian as a person due to special cloth-ing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by other objects- the typical outline of a person is not distin-guishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,have the configuration and operation of theradar sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. This also applies to collisions at slowspeeds where there is no visible damage to thefront of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camera sys-tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-vate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board com-puter (Y page 197).If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An intermittent warning tonewill then sound and the· distance warninglamp will light up in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seatbelts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approximately4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle,e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

i If there is an increased risk of a collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 55).

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking, upto the point of full brake application. Automaticemergency braking is not performed until imme-diately prior to an imminent accident.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is endedautomatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.


STEER CONTROL

General informationSTEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting anoticeable steering force to the steering wheelin the direction required for vehicle stabilization.This steering assistance is provided in particularif:RESP® is deactivatedRboth right wheels or both left wheels are on aslippery road surface when you brake heavilyRthe vehicle starts to skid


No steering support is provided by STEER CON-TROL, if:RESP® is malfunctioning.Rthe lighting is faulty.Power steering will, however, continue to func-tion.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyonecan start the engine if a valid SmartKey has beenleft inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey orKEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To switch the alarm off with the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKeymust be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-cle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

Protection against theft 71

Safety

Z

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the CustomerAssistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

72 Protection against theftSafety

SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 200).When it is dark, the surround lighting also comeson if it is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 199).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle (Y page 130).

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry theSmartKey with you. You can combine the func-

SmartKey 73

Openingandclosing

Z

tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by usingKEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and the cor-responding door handle must not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen the external door handles are touchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an extendedperiod.

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a SmartKey for anextended period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power, therebyconserving battery power. For the purposes ofactivation/deactivation, the vehiclemust not benearby.X To deactivate: press the& button on theSmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKey(Y page 76) flashes twice briefly and lightsup once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.

X To activate: press any button on the Smart-Key.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated featuresare available again.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelalone.X To change the setting: simultaneously pressthe% and& buttons on the SmartKeyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 76).

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock: press the% button once.X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

74 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the driver'sdoor.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surfaceof the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: press andhold down the% and& buttons simul-taneously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice(Y page 76).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani-cal key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 71).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 81)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 80)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

SmartKey 75

Openingandclosing

Z

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 76).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 75).

X Press mechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow until bat-

tery compartment cover: opens. Do nothold battery compartment cover: closedwhile doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing and then press toclose it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 75).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

76 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey


You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary(Y page 76).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO.

KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 76) and replace it if necessary(Y page 76).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of theSmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-trol function:X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

SmartKey 77

Openingandclosing

Z


The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 276).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Never

leave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside! The side windows will not open/close if thebattery is discharged or if the side windowshave iced up. It will then not be possible toclose the door. Do not attempt to force thedoor closed. You could otherwise damage thedoor or the side window.

78 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X To unlock a front door: pull door handle;.Locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull door handle;.X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.When a door is opened, the side window on thatside opens slightly. When the door is closed, theside window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside. The switches are on the driver’s door.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be lockedor unlocked.If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,it cannot be centrally unlocked from the inside.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 200).

Doors 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Unlocking/locking the driver's doorusing the mechanical keyi If youwant to centrally lock the vehicle usingthe mechanical key, begin by pressing thelocking button for the interior locking mech-anism while the driver's door is open. Thenlock the driver's door using the mechanicalkey.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position1.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 71).

Trunk


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 317).You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 240).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRopened with the emergency release buttonRunlocked with the mechanical key

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey .X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

80 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey (Y page 73) or withKEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

If a KEYLESS-GOkey is detected in the trunk, thetrunk lid cannot be locked and will open again.

Opening automatically from inside



Opening

X Pull remote operating switch for trunk lid:until the trunk lid opens.

You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seatwhen the vehicle is stationary and unlocked.The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can befound in the "Vehicle data" section(Y page 317).

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remainslocked and cannot be opened.

X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 75).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise from posi-tion1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is sufficientclearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart-Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 71).X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 75).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

Trunk 81

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-tion2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid han-dle.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey(Y page 75).

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-cle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened withthe trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-cle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does not openthe trunk lid if the battery is disconnected ordischarged.Trunk lid emergency release light:REmergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.REmergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocksor restricts a side window during the closingprocess, the side window opens again automat-ically. However, the automatic reversing featureis only an aid and is not a substitute for yourattentiveness when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.

82 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on thefront-passenger door as well as on the doors inthe rear compartment on the left and right-handsides for the respective side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the corre-sponding switch.

X To close fully: pull the corresponding switchbeyond the pressure point.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

You can start automatic operation when open-ing and closing the front door windows andwhen opening the rear door windows. To do so,briefly press or pull the switch to beyond the

point of resistance in the relevant direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing orpulling again.You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove theSmartKey. This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passengerdoor is opened.When the override feature for the side windowsis activated, the side windows cannot be oper-ated from the rear (Y page 61).

Opening and closing all side windows

Using the switch on the center console

G WARNINGWhile opening the sidewindows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch down to open theside window again.

You can use the switch on the center console toclose all side windows simultaneously.X Open the cover in the lower center console.The switch for all side windows is under thecover.

X To open all side windows: press switch:to the point of resistance.

X To open all side windows fully: pressswitch: beyond the point of resistance.

X To close all side windows: pull switch:.

Side windows 83

Openingandclosing

Z

Using the SmartKey

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

You can use the SmartKey to open or close allside windows simultaneously. The SmartKeymust be near the door handle.X Close the soft top (Y page 86).X Open the trunk partition (Y page 91).X To open all side windows: press the%button on the SmartKey until the side win-dows are fully opened.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To close all side windows: press the&button on the SmartKey until the side win-dows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure: releasethe& button.

Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO

G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in the clos-ing area when a side window is being closed.There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:X Release recessed sensor surface on the doorhandle.

X Immediately pull and hold the door handleand keep the door handle pulled.The side windows open.

With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win-dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO keymust be outside the vehicle. All the doors mustbe closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sensorsurface:.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releaserecessed sensor surface: on the door han-dle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 83).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switch onthe door control panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 83).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the respective side window remains closedafter the button is released, then it has beenset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat thesteps above again.

84 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.


A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.

Soft top


G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

! Never sit on the soft-top compartmentcover or stow heavy objects there. You willotherwise damage the soft top and soft-topcompartment cover of the vehicle.

! When opening and closing the soft top,make sure that:Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, as thesoft top swings upwards.Rthe trunk partition is closed.Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunkpartition.Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by theload.Rthe trunk lid is closed.Rthere are no objects on the soft-top com-partment coverRthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozen.You could otherwise damage the soft top,trunk and other parts of the vehicle.

Vehicle height when opening/closing the softtop (Y page 317).

Soft top 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Make sure that the soft top is dry and cleanbefore closing it. Otherwise, water or dirt couldenter the vehicle interior or trunk.You can open or close the soft top:Rwhen the vehicle is stationary orRwhen you do not exceed a speed of 25 mph(40 km/h)

If there is a strong head wind, it may not be pos-sible to close the soft top fully. In this case,reduce speed or stop in order to close the softtop fully.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only open or close the soft topwhen the vehicle is stationary.If the soft top does not open or close fully, thesoft-top hydraulics are depressurized and thesoft top is lowered:Rafter approximately 7 minutes when the igni-tion is switched onRimmediately if the ignition is switched off

Opening/closing with the soft topswitch


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the soft top, there isa risk that parts of the body could becometrapped by moving parts such as the roofmechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-dows. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing the roof, make surethat no parts of the body are in the vicinity ofmoving parts. Release the switch if somebodybecomes trapped.

G WARNINGIf the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph(40 km/h) the soft top stops during the open-ing or closing procedure. This impairs yourview to the rear. There is a risk of an accident.Reduce your speed to below 25 mph(40 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordancewith the traffic conditions. Press or pull thesoft-top switch again in order to open or closethe soft top fully.

Opening and closingX Make sure that the trunk partition is closed(Y page 91).

X Close the trunk lid.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.

X To open: pull soft-top switch: until theentire soft top is stowed away in the trunk.The Convertible Top in Operation mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.If, when opening, you drive at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h), the opening procedure isstopped. The Open/Close ConvertibleTop Completely message appears in themultifunction display. In order to open thesoft top fully, reduce your speed again tobelow 25mph (40 km/h) and pull the soft-topswitch again.

X To close: press and hold soft-top switch:until the soft top is fully closed.The Convertible Top in Operation mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.If, when closing, you drive at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h), the opening procedure isstopped. The Open/Close ConvertibleTop Completely message appears in themultifunction display. In order to close thesoft top fully, reduce your speed again tobelow 25 mph (40 km/h) and press the soft-top switch again.

86 Soft topOp

eningandclosing

Opening/closing using the SmartKey


G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the soft top, there isa risk that parts of the body could becometrapped by moving parts such as the roofmechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-dows. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing the roof, make surethat no parts of the body are in the vicinity ofmoving parts. Release the switch if somebodybecomes trapped.

Opening and closingThe SmartKey must be near the door handle.X To open: press the% button in the Smart-Key until the soft top is completely opened.The Convertible Top in Operation mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theseat ventilation is switched on. The rear sidewindows open.

X To close: press the& button in the Smart-Key until the soft top is completely closed.The Convertible Top in Operation mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Thesoft top and the side windows close.

Closing the soft top manually


G WARNINGClosing the soft top manually is a complex,technically challenging procedure which canalso be physically demanding. You or otherscan become trapped. There is a risk of injury.Where possible, have the soft top closedman-ually at a qualified specialist workshop.

If the soft top cannot be closed automatically,check the following points:Ris the trunk partition engaged (Y page 91)?Rare the head restraints on the rear benchseats extended?

Ris the trunk lid closed?Ris the on-board voltage sufficient?Start the engine if necessary.

If automatic operation still does not work, thesoft top can be closed manually.To carry out this work, you will need the assis-tance of another person.

Closing the soft topX Apply the parking brake.X Open the side windows.X Lower the head restraints automatically(Y page 98) or manually (Y page 98).

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Open the trunk.X Take the two straps out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 270).

X Take the hex-socket wrench out of the Oper-ator's Manual wallet and keep it with you.

X Turn rotary catch: counter-clockwise andfold cover; down.

Soft top 87

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert Allen key= into valve screw? on thehydraulic pump.

X Turn valve screw? of the hydraulic pumpwith Allen key= counter-clockwise a fullturn.

X On both sides of the trunk, tear panelingAalong the perforation in the direction of thearrow.

X Pull out catchB as far as possible on bothsides and turn it counter-clockwise about aquarter turn.

X Make sure catchB is not drawn in again.Otherwise, pull out catchB again as far aspossible and turn it counter-clockwise abouta quarter turn.

The soft-top compartment hinges are on theright-hand and left-hand side in the gap betweenthe lid of the soft-top compartment and thetrunk seal.X Move both leversC of soft-top compartmenthinges forwards beyond the detent positionon both sides.

X On both sides, pull the straps through behindthe soft-top compartment hinges in the direc-tion of the arrowD.

X Route the straps through the created loops.

X Pull the straps between the soft-top compart-ment hinges and the soft-top compartment.i Do not pull the straps as long as the trunk isopen.

88 Soft topOp

eningandclosing

X Place strapsE on the soft-top compartmentlid.i Take the hex-socket wrench and the Smart-Key out of the trunk if necessary. You can onlyaccess the trunk again once you have fullyclosed the soft top manually.

X Make sure that catchB is not pulled again.Otherwise, pull out catchB again as far aspossible and turn it counter-clockwise abouta quarter turn.

X Close the trunk lid.

! The trunk lid must be closed for the nextsteps. The soft top compartment cover couldotherwise collide with the trunk lid.

X Each person takes a strap.X Pulling with force, simultaneously lift out thecover of the soft-top compartment up and outby the straps in the direction of the arrow.

G WARNINGIf anywhere other than the indicated grippingpoints is gripped, you or others can becometrapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury.Take off jewelry and watches. Only hold theindicated gripping points. Do not reachbetween the cover halves and into the hinges.

X One person stands on the right-hand side andthe other person on the left-hand side of thevehicle.

X Grip the soft-top compartment with one handas illustrated.

X Use the other hand to support yourself on theedge of the trunk lid as illustrated.

X Lift soft-top compartment lidF up as far as itwill go. In doing so, pull soft-top compartmentcoverF evenly to the rear, applying constantforce.

G WARNINGIf anywhere other than the indicated grippingpoints is gripped, you or others can becometrapped or stuck. There is a risk of injury.Take off jewelry and watches. Only hold theindicated gripping points. Do not reachbetween the cover halves and into the hinges.

X Reach under the tip of soft topG in the soft-top compartment from the right-hand andleft-hand sides.

X Lift the soft top out of the soft-top compart-ment and guide it forwards in the direction ofthe arrow onto windshield frameH.

Soft top 89

Openingandclosing

Z

I To openJ To lockX Pull off the cover of the roof lock behind theoverhead control panel.

X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock.X Turn the Allen key clockwiseI as far as it willgo.

! During the following step, make sure thatthe Allen key is turned counter-clockwise asfar as it will go. Otherwise, the soft top maynot be properly locked.

X Turn Allen keyJ counter-clockwise as far asit will go.The soft top is now pre-locked on the wind-shield frame.

X Move material tensioning frameK to anupright position.

! Make sure the soft-top compartment coverdoes not collide with the material tensioningframe during the following step.

X Lower soft-top compartment lidL.

X With your hand flat, press down the materialtensioning frame until it rests on soft-top sup-portM of the soft-top compartment lid.

X With your hand flat, press the soft-top com-partment cover forwards/downwards onboth sides simultaneously until it engages inthe guide. Apply your hands to the points indi-cated with arrows.At the same time, press the material tension-ing frame gently downwards with your flathand.

X Insert the Allen key into the roof lock.X Turn Allen keyN counter-wise as far as it willgo.

X Have the soft-top mechanism repaired imme-diately at a specialist workshop.

90 Soft topOp

eningandclosing

i Press the soft-top compartment lid again ifthe trunk lid cannot be opened.

! Do not under any circumstances open thetrunk lid with the emergency key. You couldotherwise damage the trunk lid and the soft-top compartment cover.

Relocking the soft top


G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

The soft top is not locked if:Rthe Convertible Top in Operation mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten secondswhen pulling away or while driving.

LockingYou can lock the soft top again if it is not lockedfully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traf-fic conditions.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Press the soft-top switch (Y page 86).

Trunk partition

General notes! In order to avoid damaging the soft top orstowed loads, please adhere to the followingwhile the soft top is open:Rwhen the trunk partition is open, do notplace any objects in or behind the net onthe side that are too long. These objects

could obstruct the trunk partition or causedamage to the open soft top.Rmake sure that the cargo does not push thetrunk partition upwards.

The soft top can only be opened when the trunkpartition is closed.The trunk partition can be used to cover luggageand loads in the trunk.

Opening and closing

X To close: pull trunk partition: by the handlein the direction of the arrow until it rests onthe sides of the trunk.Trunk partition: finishes closing automati-cally.

X To open: push trunk partition: against thedirection of the arrow by the handle.Trunk partition: finishes opening automat-ically.

Brackets for the wind screen

G WARNINGIf you use the wind screen in darkness or inother conditions offering poor visibility, yourview to the rear is further impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Only use the wind screen when visibility con-ditions are good.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse wind screens which have been tested andapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thishelps to prevent damage to the vehicle.

! Observe the backrest position of the frontseats if the wind screen is installed, since the

Soft top 91

Openingandclosing

Z

backrest could collide with the wind screenhere.

The wind screen protects against wind whendriving with the soft top open. It is securedabove the rear bench seats. For this reason, onlythe driver and the front passenger can travel inthe vehicle when the wind screen is installed.X When installing the wind screen, use lateralbrackets:.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

AIRCAP


G WARNINGWhen retracting the AIRCAP, persons couldbecome caught in the moving mechanism.There is a risk of injury.Ensure that persons do not hold onto theupper frame of the windshield and do nottouch the AIRCAP wind deflector.

With AIRCAP, four people can travel comfortablywith the soft top open. AIRCAP reduces the draftfor the driver and passengers in both the frontand the rear compartment in a vehicle with thesoft top down.AIRCAP has the following components:Ra wind deflector between the windshield andthe soft topRan AIRCAPwind screen between the two headrestraints on the rear bench seat

You can open or close AIRCAP either when thevehicle is stationary or when driving up to aspeed of 100 mph (160 km/h).

Extending AIRCAP

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.X Press AIRCAP button:.The two indicator lamps on theAIRCAPbuttonlight up.

Wind deflector; extends.

The head restraints on the rear bench seats andAIRCAP wind screen= move to the centerposition simultaneously.When a seat belt in the rear compartment isfastened, the head restraints on the rear benchseats and AIRCAP wind screen= move to theupper position.

92 Soft topOp

eningandclosing

If you park your vehicle with the soft top downand remove the SmartKey, the wind deflectorand the head restraints in the rear compartmentretract automatically. When you start the engineagain, thewind deflector and the head restraintsin the rear compartment extend again automat-ically.AIRCAP cannot be extended or retracted if thevehicle speed exceeds approximately 100 mph(160 km/h).

Retracting AIRCAPX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.X Press AIRCAP button:.The two indicator lamps on the AIRCAP buttongo out. Wind deflector; retracts.The head restraints on the rear bench seats andAIRCAP wind screen= move to the lowestposition simultaneously.If there are passengers wearing seat belts in therear compartment, the head restraints on therear bench seats and the AIRCAP wind screenremain in the upper position.

Retracting the head restraints on therear bench seats from the driver's seatTo improve the rear view, you can retract thehead restraints on the rear bench seats individ-ually (Y page 98). The wind deflector remainsin its current position.

Installing and removing the AIRCAPwind screen

PreparationYouwill need a4mmAllen key to install/removethe AIRCAP wind screen.Before installing or removing the AIRCAP windscreen:X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Open the folding roof fully (Y page 86).X Extend the head restraints in the rear com-partment fully (Y page 98).

Removing

X Use the 4 mm Allen key to turn the bolts onboth sides counter-clockwise by about 90°and loosen them.

X Pull the bolts out of the brackets on the headrestraints.

X Pull the AIRCAP wind screen out of the guiderails in the direction of the arrow. Make surethat you pull the AIRCAP wind screen for-wards slightly when doing so.

Installing

X Keeping the AIRCAP wind screen horizontal,guide it into the slot between the head

Soft top 93

Openingandclosing

Z

restraints in the direction of the arrow withboth racks straight down.

X Push the AIRCAP wind screen down until thebolts are at the same height as the bracketson the head restraints.

X Insert the bolts into the brackets on bothsides.

X Tighten the bolts with the 4mmAllen key untilthey engage.The markings on the bolts are vertical.

94 Soft topOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the soft top


The soft top will not openor close.

The ignition is not switched on.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.

The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80).

The trunk partition is not closed.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 91).

The roll bars have been deployed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The head restraints in the rear compartment do not retract automat-ically.X Lower the head restraints in the rear compartment manually(Y page 98).

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.X Close the soft top manually if necessary (Y page 87).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. Thesoft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

Soft top 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

Observe the following when adjusting steeringwheel:, seat belt; and driver's seat=:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seatcushion.Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and youcan depress the pedals properly.Rthe back of your head is supported at eye levelby the center of the head restraint.Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.

Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly.Ryou should have a good overview of trafficconditions.Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the bodyand is routed across the center of your shoul-der and across your hips in the pelvic area.

Further related subjects:RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 97)RAdjusting the steering wheel (Y page 103)RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 43).RAdjusting the rear-view mirror and exteriormirrors (Y page 105).RStoring the seat, steering wheel and exteriormirror settings using the memory function(Y page 108).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 45) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 57).

96 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-

als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front seats areinstalled with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 55). For this reason, it is not possibleto remove the head restraints from the frontseats.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front-passenger seat is in an unfavorable position,it is moved to a better position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 108).

i Vehicles with the through-loading feature: ifyou fold down a rear seat backrest, therespective front seat is moved forwardsslightly if necessary. This prevents the seatsfrom colliding.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the head restraints



G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the front andrear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust theheight and angle of the head restraints to thecorrect position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possible toyour head.Observe the important safety notes regardingthe seats (Y page 96).

Adjusting the head restraint heightelectrically

X Slide switch for head restraint height adjust-ment: up or down in the direction of thearrow.

Adjusting the rear head restraints

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To lower: press button:.The head restraints move to the lowest posi-tion.

X To extend: press button: again.The head restraints onlymove into the centralposition if AIRCAP is activated and no rearseat belt has been fastened.

i Please see further information on AIRCAP(Y page 92).

Manually lowering the rear headrestraintsIf the head restraints in the rear compartmentare in the upper position, the soft top cannot beclosed fully.


gwheelandmirrors

Lower the head restraints in the rear compart-ment manually if:Rthe head restraint electronics are malfunc-tioning.Rthe opening or closing procedure of the softtop is interrupted, leaving the soft top com-partment cover open.

Cover; can only be released if:Rthe soft top is interrupted during the openingor closing procedure.Rthe soft top compartment cover is left open.X Push the mechanical key into two open-ings: between the head restraints untilcover; releases.

X Take off cover;.

X Lowering the head restraints: turn thumb-wheel: in the direction of the front seats.

Folding the front seat backrestsforward/back


G WARNINGIf the backrest is not engaged, it could foldforwards during a braking maneuver or in theevent of an accident, for example. The seatbackrest will then push the vehicle occupantagainst the seat belt. The seat belt can nolonger offer the intended level of protectionand could even cause injuries. There is anincreased risk of injury.Before each journey,make sure that the back-rest engages fully as described.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirrors and fasten your seat belt before start-ing the engine.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Folding the seat backrest forward

The seat moves forwards if you have folded thebackrest forwards and the seat is in the rear halfof the range. Thismakes it easier for passengersto get into and out of the rear compartment. Thehead restraint is lowered simultaneously.X Pull seat release handle: forwards and foldthe backrest forwards as far as it will go.The seat automatically moves to the foremostposition and the head restraint is lowered.

Folding the seat backrest backX Swing back the seat backrest.The seat moves automatically to the storedposition.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar

region= To adjust the backrest contour in the upper

back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-

rest

You can adjust the contour of the front seatindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.

Seat heating and seat ventilation

Switching the seat heating on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.


gwheelandmirrors

Driver's and front-passenger seatThe three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches down fromlevel 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches off approx-imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 128).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Driver's and front-passenger seatThe three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 128).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.


i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the soft top and the rear sidewindows with the SmartKey (Y page 87). Theseat ventilation of the driver's seat automat-ically switches to the highest level.

Seats 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation


The seat heating or seatventilation has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation can be switched back on manually.

AIRSCARF

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

Driver's and front-passenger seatThe AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.The warm air flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-cate the heating level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until the desiredheating level is set.


You can use the adjustable fins on the headrestraint to adjust the height of the current of airblown out according to your height.Make sure that no objects are covering theintake grille on the rear of the driver's-side/front-passenger seat backrest.

i The blower continues running for seven sec-onds to cool down the heating elements.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.

Steering wheel



G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

102 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-

and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 104)RStoring settings (Y page 108)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off


X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-tion of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch offthe ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

i The steering wheel heating may switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †).

Indicator lamp= remains on.

Steering wheel 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the steering wheel heating


The steering wheel heat-ing has switched off pre-maturely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heatingwill switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Vehicles with a memory function: if there is arisk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel,you can also one of the memory function posi-tion buttons. The adjustment process is stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 200).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards when you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door;the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 must be inthe ignition lock (Y page 128).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards if ithas not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stopbutton onceorRwith the SmartKey: you insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock

When you close the driver's door with the igni-tion switched on, the steering wheel is alsoautomatically moved to the previously set posi-tion.

104 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The last position of the steering wheel is storedwhen you switch off the ignition or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 108).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-gered in an accident, the steering column willmove upwardswhen the driver's door is opened.This occurs irrespective of the position of theSmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is onlyoperational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 200).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare lever: for-wards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.

Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.


X Press button: for the left-hand exterior mir-ror or button; for the right-hand exteriormirror.The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-ton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again after sometime. You can adjust the selectedmirror usingadjustment button= as long as the indicatorlamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic condi-tions.

The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger fieldof vision.After the engine has been started, the exteriormirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-dow defroster is switched on and the outside

Mirrors 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

temperature is low. Heating takes amaximumoften minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically


X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the "Fold inmirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer(Y page 201).X Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in Canada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 201):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror intothe correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exteriormirrors: press and hold mirror-folding buttonuntil you hear a click and then the mirrorsengage in position (Y page 106).The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 105).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.

106 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions are met simul-taneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exterior

mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MX Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory buttonYou can store the parking position of the exte-rior mirror on the front-passenger side usingmemory buttonM?. The reverse gearmust notbe engaged.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. In theexterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curbshould be visible.

X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthese steps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Mirrors 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

The memory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignitionlock.With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 97).X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 103) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 105).

X Press memory button M and one of the stor-age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within threeseconds.The settings are stored in the selected presetposition. A tone sounds when the settingshave been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage positionbutton 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheeland exteriormirrors are in the stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted as soonas you release the storage position button.

108 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicleis equipped with special daytime running lamps.In some countries, operation of the headlampsvaries due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations.If you wish to drive during the daytime withoutlights, switch off the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer(Y page 199).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 110)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 199)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlled

by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lamp

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lightsetting is automatically selected according tothe brightness of the ambient light (exception:poor visibility due to weather conditions such asfog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-matically depending on the brightness of theambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have activatedthe Daytime Running Lights function viathe on-board computer, the daytime runninglamps or the parking lamps and the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or off automati-cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-ent light.

X To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch toÃ.

Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-ning lamps function is required by law in Can-ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/

Exterior lighting 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn thelight switch to T, the daytime running lampsand parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings take prec-edence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visibilityof your vehicle during the day. To do this, thedaytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 199).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thickfog. Please take note of the country-specificregulations for the use of rear fog lamps.

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 orstart the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoidusing the parking lamps T over a period ofseveral hours. If possible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to T.The green T indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lock orit should be in position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side ofthe vehicle) or X (right-hand side of thevehicle).

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right

110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlampsmanually: turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock or start the engine.

X Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam Assist:turn the light switch to L orÃ.

X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turnthe light switch to L.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: ifAdaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto-matically controls activation and deactivation ofthe high-beam headlamps (Y page 111).

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Cornering light functionThe cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better visi-bility in tight bends, for example. It can only beactivated when the low-beam headlamps areswitched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turnthe steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off after nomore than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notesYou can use this function to set the headlampsto change between low beam and high beamautomatically. The system recognizes vehicleswith their lights on, either approaching from theopposite direction or traveling in front of your

Exterior lighting 111


Z

vehicle, and consequently switches the head-lamps from high beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beamheadlamp range depending on the distance tothe other vehicle. Once the system no longerdetects any other vehicles, it reactivates thehigh-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead control panel.


G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive HighbeamAssist is only an aid. You areresponsible for adjusting the vehicle's lightingto the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-ditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles can berestricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunctiondisplay lights up when it is dark and the lightsensor activates the low-beam headlamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between the vehi-cle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other roadusers have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16mph (25 km/h) or other road usershave been detected or the roads are ade-quately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-cator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its normal position or move the lightswitch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

: u Switches the interior lighting on/off; | Switches the automatic interior light-

ing control on/off= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp

on/off? c Switches the front interior lighting on/

offA p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept when the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on/off: press the | button.When the automatic interior lighting control isactivated, the button is flush with the over-head control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-offusing the on-board computer (Y page 200).

Replacing bulbs


G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Vehicles with static LED headlamps:Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if itsglass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designedfor that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of thesame type and the specified voltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the service lifeof the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glasstube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub itoff with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.Do not allow bulbs to come into contact withliquids.Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 114).Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourselfreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Headlamps and lights are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.Vehicles with static LED headlampsThe front and rear light clusters of your vehicleare equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required.

Replacing bulbs 113


Z

Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these func-tion correctly at all times. Have the headlampsetting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Static LED headlamps: High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Changing the front bulbs

High-beamheadlamps (static LED head-lamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull out.

X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.

X Insert bulb holder; and turn it clockwise.X Press on housing cover: and turn it to theright.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on thewindshield can scratch the glassif wiping takes place when the windshield isdry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield after the vehicle has been washedin an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-dues may be the reason for this. Clean thewindshield using washer fluid after washingthe vehicle in an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set

to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow

114 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than in theÄ position, causing the windshield wiper towipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lockor turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull wiperblade; upwards from the wiper arm in thedirection of the arrow.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position newwiper blade: in the retainer onthe wiper arm and slide it into place in thedirection of the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Windshield wipers 115


Z

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wipermovement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

116 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated when theengine is running. Optimum operation is onlyachievedwith the side windows and roof closed.The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 125).

i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired interiortemperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most parti-cles of dust and soot and completely filtersout pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutantsand odors. A clogged filter reduces theamount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For this reason, you should always observethe interval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-let.

i It is possible that the residual heat functionmay be activated automatically an hour afterthe SmartKey is removed. The vehicle is thenventilated for 30minutes to dry the automaticclimate control.

Overview of climate control systems 117

Climatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123)? DisplayA Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)G Sets the airflow (Y page 123)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)

USA only: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123)? Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)A Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 123)B Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)C Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)D Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120)E Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122)F Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)

118 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

G Sets the airflow (Y page 123)H Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)I Display

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 121); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 123)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 123)? DisplayA Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 125)B Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 125)C Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 121)D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 124)E Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 120)F Sets the temperature, right (Y page 122)G Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 122)H Sets the airflow (Y page 123)I Sets the air distribution (Y page 122)J Sets the temperature, left (Y page 122)

Rear control panelK Increases the temperature (Y page 122)L DisplayM Reduces the temperature (Y page 122)

Overview of climate control systems 119

Climatecontrol

Optimum use of automatic climatecontrol

Climate control systemBelow, you can find a number of notes and rec-ommendations to help you use climate controloptimally.The 3-zone automatic climate control is onlyavailable on vehicles for Canada.RActivate climate control using theÃ and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above theÃ and¿ buttons light up.RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-trol: in automatic mode, you can also set theclimatemode (FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE).The MEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-ature settings on the driver's side for thefront-passenger side and the rear compart-ment as well. The indicator lamp above theá button goes out.RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-trol: use the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residual heatfunction can only be activated or deactivatedwith the ignition switched off.RIf you change the settings of the climate con-trol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three seconds atthe bottom of the screen in the multimediasystem display. You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control functions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 132).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only briefly

i Activate climate control primarily using theÃ button (Y page 121).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp above theÃ buttonlights up. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp above the^ buttonlights up.

120 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up morequickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The airinside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Switching on/offX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp above the¿ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp above the¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function


The indicator lamp overthe¿ button flashesthree times or remainsoff. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" func-tion cannot be switchedon.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained automatically at a constant level. Thesystemautomatically regulates the temperatureof the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-tribution.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis activated automatically in automatic mode.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp above theÃ buttonlights up. Automatic air distribution and air-flow are activated.i 3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you can set theclimate mode (Y page 122).

X To switch to manual mode:Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressair distribution adjustment switchF(Y page 118).

Operating the climate control systems 121

Climatecontrol

3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment switchI(Y page 119).The indicator lamp above theÃ buttongoes out.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressairflow adjustment switchG (Y page 118).3-zone automatic climate control: press air-flow adjustment switchH (Y page 119).The indicator lamp above theÃ buttongoes out.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThe "Set climatemode" function is only availablewith 3-zone automatic climate control.You can select the following climate mode set-tings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler settingMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draft-

free settingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Press theÃ button.X Press climate mode selection buttonG up ordown and select the desired level(Y page 119).

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe front compartment: press temperatureadjustment switchE orH up or down(Y page 118).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate controlYou can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswellas for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe front compartment: press temperatureadjustment switchF orJ up or down(Y page 119).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the front con-trol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.

X Press temperature adjustment switchF orJ up or down (Y page 119).Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the rear con-trol panel: press ther ors button onthe rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and side air vents as well as the footwellair vents (Cabriolet only)

¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the side airvents. The side air vents can only be closedwhen the controls on the side air vents areturned downwards.


Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Dual-zone automatic climate control: pressair distribution adjustment switchF up ordown, until the desired symbol appears in thedisplay (Y page 118).

X 3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment switchI up ordown, until the desired symbol appears in thedisplay (Y page 119).

Setting the airflow

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To increase or reduce: press airflow adjust-ment switchG up or down (Y page 118).

3-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To increase or reduce: press airflow adjust-ment switchH up or down (Y page 119).

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, bloweroutput may be reduced. As soon as the batteryis sufficiently charged, full blower output will beavailable.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttonlights up.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side and therear compartment.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp above theá buttongoes out.Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is adop-ted for the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or sidewindows on the inside.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp above the¬ buttonlights up.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged, bloweroutput may be reduced. Once the battery is suf-ficiently charged again, full blower output will beavailable again.X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp above the¬ buttongoes out. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

MAX COOL maximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.


Climatecontrol

When you activate MAX COOL, climate controlswitches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with air dehumidi-fication function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X Adjust the side air vents so that the warmedair is directed to the side windows.

X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"windshield defrosting" function¬.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Climate control: press air distribution adjust-ment switchF up or down (Y page 118), untiltheP orO symbol appears in the dis-play.

X 3-zone automatic climate control: press airdistribution adjustment switchI up or down(Y page 119), until theP orO symbolappears in the display.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp above the¤ buttonlights up or goes out.


Problems with the rear window defroster


The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defrostercan be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehicle fromoutside. The air already inside the vehicle willthen be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.

Activating or deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp above theg buttonlights up.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp above theg buttongoes out.i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡(5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesIt is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the vehicle forapproximately 30 minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off. The heating time depends onthe set interior temperature.The "residual heat" function only functions opti-mally with the side windows closed.The "residual heat" function only functions opti-mally with the soft top closed.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 128).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp above theÌ buttonlights up.i If the residual heat function is activated, thewindows may fog up on the inside.

i The blowerwill run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated. The blower runs at medium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp above theÌ buttongoes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops


Climatecontrol

Air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents

Example: Defroster vent; Side air vent= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= up ordown.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-

midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-ture-sensitive items stored in the glove boxcould be damaged.

: Air vent control; Air ventWhen the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instance tocool its contents. The level of airflowdepends onthe airflow and air distribution settings.X To open or close: turn control: to theclockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the blower output of the AIR-SCARF vents

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

You can adjust the blower output of AIRSCARFvents: using the AIRSCARF button(Y page 102).

126 Air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1000 miles(1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the red areaof the tachometer.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and accelerate thevehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective maximumpermissible speed.

Driving


G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehiclestationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid highengine speeds and driving at full throttle untilthe engine has reached its operating temper-ature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

Driving 127

Drivingandparking

Z

Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey(shift the transmission to position P)

1 Power supply for some consumers, such asthe windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignitionlock even if it is not the correct SmartKey forthe vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped withSmartkeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the Smartkey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button into theignition lock, the system needs approximatelytwo seconds recognition time. You can then usethe Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several times insuccession corresponds to the different keypositions in the ignition lock. This is only thecase if you are not depressing the brake pedal.

If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-key determines whether a valid Smartkey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example, whenstarting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartkey:Rthe Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock.Rthe Smartkey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartkey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73).

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another Smartkey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.If you lock the vehicle with the Smartkey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryouwill not be able to start the enginewith theStart/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

If you lock the vehicle centrally using the buttonon the front door (Y page 79), you can continueto start the engine with the Start/Stop button.The engine can be switched off while the vehicleis in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This functionoperates independently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

128 DrivingDrivingandparking

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations where anindicator lamp either fails to go out after startingthe engine or lights up while driving(Y page 226).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You can nowactivate the windshield wipers, for example.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhen inthis position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stopbutton: twice.The ignition is switched on.If you press Start/Stop button: once whenin this position, the ignition is deactivatedagain.

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock and start the vehicle as normalusing the Smartkey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stopbutton mode and Smartkey operation when thetransmission is in position P.

X Remove Start/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-ton from the ignition lock when you leave thevehicle. You should, however, always take theSmartkey with you when leaving the vehicle. Aslong as the Smartkey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Driving 129

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

General notesi The catalytic converter is preheated for upto 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound ofthe engine may change during this time.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P.

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stopbutton out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the ignitionlock and release it as soon as the engine isrunning (Y page 128).

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the enginei The Start/Stop button can be used to startthe vehicle manually without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.This mode for starting the engine operatesindependently of the ECO start/stop auto-matic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 128).The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and the ReleasePark. Brake message appears in the multi-function display, the parking brake is stillapplied. Release the parking brake.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 200).It is only possible to shift the transmission fromposition P to the desired position if you depressthe brake pedal. If you do not depress the brakepedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still bemoved but the parking lock remains engaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.


Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stoppedunder certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activated when-ever you start the engine using the Smartkey orthe Start/Stop button.

If the engine has been switched off automati-cally by the ECO start/stop function, the¤symbol is shown in the multifunction display.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can also be activated ifthe engine has been switched off automati-cally. It is then not necessary to continueapplying the brakes during the automatic stopphase. When you depress the acceleratorpedal, the engine starts automatically and thebraking effect of the HOLD function is deac-tivated.

i The engine can be switched off automati-cally a maximum of four times (first stop andthree subsequent stops) in succession.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function bypressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and theHOLD function is notactiveRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear R

Driving 131

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou move the transmission out of position PRyou unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-er's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too low

i Shifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stopfunction has been deactivated manually or asthe result of a malfunction. The engine will thennot be switched off automatically when the vehi-cle stops.


Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the Smartkey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 129). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain thebattery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 278).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The coolant temperaturegauge shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 259). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Driving 133

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position. The current transmission posi-tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission

position display in the multifunction display(Y page 134).

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position is engaged.Ideally, you should select transmission posi-tion D and drive program E or S.

The current transmission position and drive pro-gram appear in the multifunction display.The arrows in the transmission position displayshowhowand intowhich transmission positionsyou can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

Engaging park position P! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicleis moving, do not shift the automatic trans-mission directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P. The automatic transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.

X Push theDIRECTSELECT lever in the directionof arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down disengages the park-ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.In order to shift frompark positionP directly intoR or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downpast the first point of resistance

134 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smartkeyand remove the SmartkeyRyou switch off the engine using the Smartkeyor using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door or front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is openedwhen the vehicle isstationary or driving at very low speed and thetransmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-mission shifts automatically to transmissionposition P if the HOLD function or DISTRONICPLUS is activated. Observe the information onthe HOLD function (Y page 162) and onDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 156).

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the first point of resistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-tion on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 131).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the first point of resist-ance.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe Smartkey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.WithKEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N: pushthe DIRECT SELECT lever down past the firstpoint of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECTlever down past the first point of resistance.

Automatic transmission 135

Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 144). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the parkingbrake in addition to the parking lockin order to secure the vehicle.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunc-tioning, the transmission may belocked in position P. Have the vehicleelectronics checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using theSmartkey and remove the Smart-keyRyou switch off the engine using theSmartkey or using the Start/Stopbutton and open the driver's dooror front-passenger doorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or drivingat very low speed and the trans-mission is in position D or R

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shiftthe transmission only to position N ifthe vehicle is in danger of skidding,e.g. on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R or D, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 137)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 136)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts


KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D and Rcan help to free a vehicle that has become stuckin mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-ment restricts switching between transmissionpositionsD and R to speeds up to amaximum of5mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R, move theDIRECT SELECT lever up and down past thepoint of resistance.

Program selector buttonThe program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving characteris-tics.

All vehicles (except vehicles with dynamic han-dling package or the AMG sports package)X Press program selector button:.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

Vehicles with dynamic handling package or theAMG sports packageX Press program selector button:.The selected drive program appears in themultifunction display.

i The permanent drive programM is availableon the following vehicles:RVehicles with the dynamic handling pack-ageRVehicles with the AMG Sports packageFurther information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 139).As well as this permanent drive program M,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 138).

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 138).

i The automatic transmission shifts to auto-matic drive program E each time the engine isstarted.


Drivingandparking

Z

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program, you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;.Further information about permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 139).Further information about temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 138).

i You can only change gear with the steeringwheel paddle shifters when the transmissionis in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program EDrive program E is characterized by the follow-ing:Rcomfort-oriented engine settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, for exam-ple.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.

Automatic drive program SDrive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine settings.Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later.the fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.You can activate manual drive programM in theE and S automatic drive programs.

i As well as temporary drive program M, youcan also activate permanent drive programM(Y page 137).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 139).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 138).Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear andM appear in themultifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for a limi-ted amount of time. Depending on which paddleshifter is pulled, the automatic transmissionimmediately shifts into the next gear down orup, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (Y page 138).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and you con-tinue to accelerate, the automatic transmis-


sion automatically shifts up in order to pre-vent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 138).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.i If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activatedmanual drive programM, itwill remain active for a certain amount of time.Under certain conditions the minimum amountof time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateralacceleration, during an overrun phase or whendriving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deactiva-ted, the automatic transmission shifts into theautomatic drive program that was last selected.You can also deactivate manual drive programM yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in place (Y page 138).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position (Y page 134).

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 137).Manual drive program M is deactivated. Theautomatic transmission switches into theautomatic drive program that was last selec-ted.

Manual drive program

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust bein position D.

i As well as this permanent drive programM,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 138).

Switching on the manual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 137) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

The manual drive program is only available onvehicles with the dynamic handling package orAMG sports package.Manual drive program M is different from driveprogram S with regard to spontaneity, respon-siveness and smoothness of gear changes.Manual drive program M can be selected usingthe program selector button. In manual driveprogram M, you can change gear using thesteering wheel paddle shifters if the transmis-sion is in position D. The gear selected is shownin the multifunction display.

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.


Drivingandparking

Z

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in the multifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 138).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stopwithout shift-ing down, the automatic transmission willshift down to a gear that will allow the vehicleto accelerate or pull away again.

i To avoid overrevving the enginewhen down-shifting, the automatic transmission does notshift to a lower gear if this would result in themaximum engine speed being exceeded.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximum accel-eration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 137).


Problems with the transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always trans-mitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake systemor transfer case could otherwise be damaged.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for aperformance test.

! If the parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer, the ignition must beswitched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop buttonin position 0 or 1), as ESP® will otherwiseautomatically intervene. The brake systemcould otherwise be damaged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.

You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Refueling 141

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-tem could be blocked by particles from thefuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic chargecould build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized bythe Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 313).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 141).The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the key or using KEYLESS-GO.

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueledX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-tion lock (Y page 128).

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in place andrefuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leakout.

142 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the centrallocking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 213).

Refueling 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as theSmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 73).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 75).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.


! Always secure the vehicle correctly againstrolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-etrain could be damaged.

144 ParkingDrivingandparking

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartkey must be removed from the ignitionlock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine


G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.X With the Smartkey: turn the Smartkey toposition 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GOStart/Stop button (Y page 128).The engine stops and all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this corre-sponds to Smartkey position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds toSmartkey position 0: "Smartkey removed".

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-er's door or the front-passenger door or removethe Smartkey from the ignition, the automatictransmission shifts to P automatically.WithKEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the automatic trans-mission shifts to P.

If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutralN, e.g. when having the vehiclecleaned in an automatic car wash with a towingsystem:X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock.

X Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.X All vehicles: switch the ignition on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkeyin the ignition lock.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.


Parking 145

Drivingandparking

Z

If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,the brake lamps will not light up.X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release:depress the brake pedal and keepit depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or the engineis running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Can-ada only) indicator lampgoes out in the instru-ment cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only available

with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-play.

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

146 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on how eco-nomical your driving characteristics are. TheECO display assists you in achieving the mosteconomical driving style for the selected set-tings and prevailing conditions. Your drivingstyle can significantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and the mean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percentageindicates a more economical driving style.The ECOdisplay does not indicate the actual fuelconsumption. A fixed percentage count in theECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-tion.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carried outusing the following three categories:

Driving tips 147

Drivingandparking

Z

RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstant (assessment of driving behavior atall times):- The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-ance of unnecessary acceleration anddeceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-ing your distance and early release of theaccelerator. The vehicle can coast withoutuse of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate engine speeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAcceleration and Constant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for Constantwillchange.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journey toits completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there are fewerchanges. For more dynamic changes, carryout a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display, see(Y page 192).

Braking


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.

Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying light pres-sure to the pedal. This results in excessive andpremature wear to the brake pads.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the airflowto cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayed reac-tion from the brakes when braking for the firsttime. This may also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.

148 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance testsmay only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-sult a qualified specialist workshop inadvance. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignitionmust be switched off (SmartKey inposition 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the park-

ing brake is being tested on a brake dyna-mometer.Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP®may seriously damage the brake sys-tem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-tem operates automatically, the engine andthe ignition system must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brake dyna-mometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed withthe front axle raised.

Braking maneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP®may seriously damage the brake sys-tem.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so,press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at ahigh speed. This improves the grip of the brakepads.You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)on (Y page 62) or of BASPLUSwithCross-TrafficAssist on (Y page 62).The braking characteristics of the vehicle can beseriously impaired if:Rbrake pads other than those recommendedare installedRthe recommended brake fluid is not usedSafe braking can no longer be guaranteed.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.

Driving tips 149

Drivingandparking

Z

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Alwaysadapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 287).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 287).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 287).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-vative driver assistance and safety systemswhich enhance comfort and support the driver incritical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-stone on the path towards autonomous driving.Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewellthought out system – for the safety of the vehi-cle occupants and that of other road users.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 61).

150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. On long and steepdownhill gradients, especially if the vehicle isladen, you must shift to a lower gear in time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the braking effectof the engine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from overheat-ing and wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. Cruise controlcannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20mph (30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

Driving systems 151

Drivingandparking

Z

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients by auto-matically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previously storedspeed.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Deactivating cruise control


There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐trol Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detectedwith the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is especiallyimportant if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, youwill make use of the braking effect of the engine.This relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk ofa collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent acollision without your intervention. An intermit-tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-ment cluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Driving systems 153

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUScannot take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time and for staying in your lane.

Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higher speed; To store the current speed or a lower speed


= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the last

stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou;, or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down= until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you canonly activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehi-cle is stationary as well.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; up: or down= .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

To activate at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.


X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to thepreviously stored value.

Driving systems 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.


orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicleaccelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the same way as cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S or M driving pro-gram (Y page 137). Acceleration behind thevehicle in front or to the set speed is then notice-ably more dynamic. If you have selected the Edriving program, the vehicle accelerates moregently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distanceto a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.

i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-cles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 158).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.


Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.

Setting a specified minimum distanceYou can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 158).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.

You can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 158).X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.

Driving systems 157

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

Example: vehicles featuring automatic transmis-sion with a DIRECT SELECT leverWhen DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or twosegments; in the set speed range light up.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-function display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 196) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistancedisplay.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the

vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

X Select the Assist. Graphic function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 196).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle

in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears

when the cruise control lever is actuated)X Select the Assist. Graphic function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 196).

i You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you willsee the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.


i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor is openRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav-eling on a different line. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-cle in front on the edge of the road, because ofits narrow width. The distance to the vehicle infront will be too short.

Driving systems 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS willnot brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi-cles that are crossing your lane. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossingtraffic, for example, could cause your vehicle topull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle inthe center of the driving lane by means of mod-erate steering interventions in the speed rangefrom 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the top ofthe windshield.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&GoPilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking intoaccount lanemarkings, e.g. when following vehi-cles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on detected lane mark-ings (left and right), and only on the vehicle infront if lane markings are missing.If these conditions are not present, SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis-tance.DISTRONIC PLUSmust be active in order for thefunction to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotcan neither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. It cannot takeaccount of road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and trafficconditions. If you are following a vehicle which isdriving towards the edge of the road, your vehi-


cle could come into contact with the curb orother road boundaries. Be particularly aware ofother road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directlynext to your vehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on the laneor projecting out into the lane are not detected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. afterintentionally driving over a lane marking, can becorrected at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicleback to the lane. In such cases, you must steerthe vehicle yourself to ensure that it does notleave the lane.The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. ifthe road surface is wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lanemarkings are pres-ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction areaRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no longerassists you by performing steering interventionsif:Ryou actively change lanesRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steering wheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not pro-vide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed

Pay attention also to the important safety notesfor DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153).The steering interventions are carried out with alimited steering moment. The system requiresthe driver to keep his hands on the steeringwheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the systemwill first alert youwitha visual warning. A steering wheel symbolappears in the multifunction display. If you havestill not started to steer and have not taken holdof the steering wheel after five seconds at thelatest, a warning tone also sounds to remind youto take control of the vehicle. Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot function using theon-board computer (Y page 197).The DTR+: Steering Assistant On mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-ted but not ready for a steering intervention,steering wheel symbol: appears in gray. If thesystem provides you with support by means ofsteering interventions, symbol: is shown ingreen.

Driving systems 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 197).The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deac-tivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.


Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further untilë: appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.


Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-mission is shifted automatically to position P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seatbelt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Dynamic handling package withsports mode

General notesThe most important part of the dynamic han-dling package with sports mode is the adjusta-ble damping system. This automatically controlsand adapts the suspension to the respectivedriving situation.The calibration of the suspension depends on:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRyour individual selection; see the followingdescription

Vehicles with dynamic handling packagewith sports mode: In addition to the drive pro-grams E and S, there is also the manual driveprogram M (Y page 138).

Sports tuning

Example: position of dynamic handling packagewith sports mode button

The firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contact withthe road. Select this mode when employing asporty driving style, e.g. on winding countryroads.X Start the engine.X If indicator lamp; is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp; lights up. The sports sus-pension setting is selected.

i Your selection remains stored until youswitch off the engine.

Comfort tuning

In comfort mode, the driving characteristics ofyour vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,select this mode if you favor amore comfortabledriving style. Select comfort mode also whendriving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straightstretches of highway.X If indicator lamp= is not lit: press but-ton:.Indicator lamp= lights up. The comfortablesuspension setting is selected.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safe

Driving systems 163

Drivingandparking

Z

maneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. When maneuvering, parking or pullingout of a parking space, make sure that there areno persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side(example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 267).

Range

Example: side view

Example: top viewFront sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)


Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is locatedbetween the rear seats.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segmentsshowing operational readiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R or N Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC; Indicator lampIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and the indi-cator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 267).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. It measures the road on bothsides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicatesa suitable parking space. Active steering inter-vention and brake application can assist youduring parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC(Y page 163).

i The active braking application is only avail-able on vehicles with automatic transmission.

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-ing Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can drive

onto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharpangle. Otherwise, you may damage thewheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable for park-ing, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesParking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parkingspace as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or overgrownmight be identified or measured incorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupied bytrailer drawbars might not be identified assuch or be measured incorrectly.


RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 165) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active Parking Assistwill then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not use ActiveParking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures are alwayscorrect. This has a direct influence on theparking characteristics of the vehicle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. noton the sidewalk.

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range of ActiveParking Assist will not be detected when theparking space is measured. These are not takeninto account when the parking procedure is cal-culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections orloading ramps of goods vehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and deactivate Active ParkingAssist.

For further information on the detection range(Y page 164).

Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces at right angles to the direction oftravel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directly nextto one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist you park-ing in spaces that are parallel or at right anglesto the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space as beingblocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-ing blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-ver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle,e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Example: detected parking space: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automati-cally when driving forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-tem independently locates and measures park-ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of travel andat least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-cleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider thanyour vehicle

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if it is atright angles to the direction of travel. You willneed to judge whether your vehicle will fit intothe parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as astatus indicator in the instrument cluster. Whena parking space has been detected, an arrowtowards the right or the left also appears. Bydefault, Active Parking Assist only displays park-ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parkingspaces on the driver's side are displayed assoon as the turn signal on the driver's side isactivated. When parking on the driver's side,this must remain switched on until you acknowl-edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-ing thea button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel. The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you are driv-ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft(15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i Vehicles with automatic transmission:When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically duringthe parking process. You are responsible forbraking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-bol shows the desired parking space in theinstrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist: pressthea button on themultifunction steeringwheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at alltimes. When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill when the vehicle approaches therear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight parkingspaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D while thevehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to astandstill.

The Park Assist Active Select RObserve Surroundings message appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may be necessary.As soon as the parking procedure is complete,the Park Assist Disabled message appearsin the multifunction display and you will hear a


tone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle iskept stationary without the driver having todepress the brake pedal. The braking effect iscanceled when you depress the acceleratorpedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake applica-tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,you must steer and brake again yourself.PARKTRONIC is still available.X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 165).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the park-ing space after parking is dependent on vari-ous factors. These include the position andshape of the vehicles parked in front andbehind it and the conditions of the location. Itmay be the case that Active Parking Assistguides you too far into a parking space, or notfar enough into it. In some cases, it may alsolead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,you should cancel the parking procedure withActive Parking Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionpositionD. The vehicle redirects and does notdrive as far into the parking space. Should agear be changed too early, the parking pro-cedure will be canceled. A sensible parkingposition can no longer be achieved from thisposition.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can supportyou when exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must be highenough at the front and the rear. A curb is toosmall, for example.Rthe border of the parking space must not betoo wide, as the position of the vehicle mustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the parkingspace.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

i Vehicles with automatic transmission:If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilst thevehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked thevehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the direction youare pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheel orpull away.

orX To exit a parking space using Active Park-ing Assist: press thea button on themul-tifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active Accelerateand Brake Observe Surroundings mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Donot exceed a maximum speed of approx-imately 6mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assistwill be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to the message whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistActive Accelerate and Brake ObserveSurroundings message appears in the mul-tifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by waitingfor the steering procedure to complete beforepulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as instructed bythe PARKTRONIC warning displays.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to thestraight-ahead position. You hear a tone and thePark Assist Finished message appears inthe multifunction display. You will then have tosteer and merge into traffic on your own.PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

the steering, before the vehicle has exited theparking space completely. This is useful, forexample when you recognize that it is alreadypossible to pull out of the parking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.The Park Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display and youhear a tone.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the centerconsole (Y page 165).PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-ing Assist is immediately canceled. The ParkAssist Canceled message appears in themultifunction display and you hear a tone.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automaticallyif:Rthe transmission is shifted too earlyRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-ger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. Insuch cases the÷warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-appears and themultifunction display shows thePark Assist Canceled message.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind yourvehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdisplay depends on the language setting. Thefollowing are examples of rear view cameramessages in the multimedia system display.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-ter


Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 267)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of the rearview camera may be restricted due to additionalaccessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,leaving the standard height can result in inac-curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech-nical conditions.

i The rear view camera is protected from rain-drops and dust by means of a flap. When therear view camera is activated, this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished themaneuvering processRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning (Y page 267).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the Digital Operator's Manual).

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The areabehind the vehicle is shownwith guide lines inthe multimedia system display.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Messages in themultimedia systemdis-playThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steeringwheel angle (dynamic)

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayWhen PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 165),additional measurement operational readinessindicator; appears in the multimedia systemdisplay. If the PARKTRONICwarning displays areactive or light up, warning displays: and=are also active or light up correspondingly.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steeringwheel, vehicle width including the exteriormirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

? Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 171).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, carefullyback up until you reach the end position.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost parallelin the parking space.


Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 171).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the parkingspace until yellow guide line; reaches park-ing space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that position andback up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.The white lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possible.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center positionwhile the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle

; White guide line without turning the steeringwheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reached thefinal position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel in theparking space.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 165),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in thedisplay of the multimedia system. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-ing displays= light up in themultimedia systemin yellow or red accordingly.

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system that consists offour cameras.The system processes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrorsThe cameras capture the immediate surround-ings of the vehicle. The system supports you,e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at anexit.You can show pictures from the 360° camera infull-screen mode or in seven different split-screen views on the multimedia system display.A split-screen view also includes a top view ofthe vehicle. This view is calculated from the datasupplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-era).The six split-screen views are:

Rtop view and picture from the rear view cam-era (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and images from the rear-facing sidecameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the forward-facingside cameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the dynamicguidelines are hidden.When you change between transmission posi-tions D and R, you see the previously selectedfront or rear view.Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will alsobe optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle icon in the top view, orRat the bottom right as red or yellow bracketsaround the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONICis activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: an object ispresent in close range of the vehicleRred line: an object is present in the immediateclose range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may show adistorted view of obstacles, show them incor-rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not asubstitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneuver-ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,make sure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you are maneuver-ing.You are always responsible for safety, and mustalways pay attention to your surroundings whenparking and maneuvering. This applies to theareas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-ers.


The 360° camera will not function or will func-tion in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which the cam-eras are installed are damaged. In this event,have the camera position and setting checkedat a qualified specialist workshop

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damage toobjects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.The field of vision and other functions of thecamera system may be restricted due to addi-tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leaving thestandard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cameraRthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlockRthe multimedia system is switched onRthe 360° Camera function is switched onSwitching on the 360° cameraX Press theØ button in the center consolefor longer than two seconds.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:

Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

orX Press theØ button in the center console.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select 360° Camera and press7 to confirm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and the imagefrom the front camera orRa split screen with top view and the imagefrom the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automaticallydisplayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by R gearfunction is selected in the multimedia system(see the separate operating instructions).

X To show the 360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in themultimedia system display in split-screenmode. You see the top view of the vehicle andthe image from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen viewsX To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn3the controller.

X To switch to 180° View: turn3 the con-troller to select 180° View and press7 toconfirm.

i The 180° Viewoption is only available in thefollowing views:RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front camera

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Messages in themultimedia systemdis-play

Important safety notesThe systemmay show a distorted view of obsta-cles or show them incorrectly or not at all.Obstacles are not shown by the system in thefollowing locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin close range above the handle on the trunklidRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the variouscameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

; Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image

= Guide line for the maximum steering angle


A Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1m) from the rear of the vehicleD BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)



A Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.3 m) from the front of the vehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1 m) from the front of the vehi-cle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with topview and rear view camera image enlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle

This view assists you in estimating the distanceto the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side cam-eras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facingside camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side camera settingfor the rear-facing view.

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen setting with rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this view when you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,for example.

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stoppedRwhen you select transmission position P, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe previous display appears on the multimediasystem display. You can also switch the displayby selecting the& symbol in the display andpressing7 the controller to confirm.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It isactive in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSISTdetects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-ing lapses in concentration on the part of thedriver, it suggests taking a break.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might notalways recognize fatigue or increasing inatten-tiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all.The system is not a substitute for a well-restedand attentive driver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed or notoccur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less than approx-imately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surfaceis uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-erationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUSSteering Assist activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as when youchange lanes or change your speed

The attention level evaluation is deleted andrestarts when the journey is continued, if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open the driv-er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or totake a break

Displaying the attention level

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 196) ofthe on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for ATTENTIONASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 196).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTIONASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levelsfrom high to low.Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output a warn-ing, the System Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 197).The system determines the attention level ofthe driver depending on the setting selected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity with whichthe system determines the attention level is setto normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.The attention level detected by Attention Assistis adapted accordingly and the driver is warnedearlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÀ symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-tion display in the assistance display when theengine is running.WhenATTENTIONASSIST has been deactivated,it is automatically reactivated after the enginehas been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-responds to the last selection activated (stand-ard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentrationare detected, a warning appears in the multi-function display: Attention Assist: Take aBreak!In addition to the message shown in the multi-function display, you will then hear a warningtone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest. If you do not takea break, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen


if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-tration.Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is outputin the multifunction display, a service stationsearch is performed in the multimedia system.You can select a service station and navigationto this service station will then begin. This func-tion can be activated and deactivated in themultimedia system.

Traffic Sign Assist

General notesTraffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speedpermitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.The data stored in the navigation system andgeneral traffic regulations are used to determinethe current speed limit.As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-works) are not detected.If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle ispassed, the display of the speed limits is upda-ted.Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by anadditional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are alsoshown.The traffic signs are only displayed with therestrictions if:Rthe regulation must be observed with therestriction, orRTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determinewhether the restriction applies

If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine amaximumpermitted speed fromany of the avail-able sources, no speed limit is displayed in theinstrument cluster either.

Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-tries. In this case, symbol: is shown in theassistance graphic display (Y page 196).

Important safety notesTraffic SignAssist is only an aid and is not alwaysable to correctly display speed limits. Trafficsigns always have priority over the Traffic SignAssist display.The system may be either functionally impairedor temporarily unavailable if the information inthe digital streetmap of the navigation system isincorrect or out of date.

Instrument cluster display

Displaying the assistance graphicX Call up the assistance graphics display func-tion using the on-board computer(Y page 196).

X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.Detected traffic signs are displayed in theinstrument cluster.

Speed limit with unknown restriction

: Maximum permitted speed; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for

which the restriction in the additional sign isrelevant

= Additional sign for unknown restrictionA maximum permitted speed of 100 mph(100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Speed limits in wet conditions

: Maximum permitted speed; Additional signs for wet conditionsA maximum permitted speed of 80 mph(80 km/h) applies inwet conditions and if TrafficSign Assist has determined that the restrictionmust be observed.

Canceling the speed limit

The speed limit no longer applies:.

i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)depends on the country in which you are driv-ing. It is generally neither shown on the trafficsign nor on the instrument cluster butmust betaken into account when observing the max-imum permitted speed.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 180) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 182).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system tomonitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle.It supports you from a speed of approximately20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in theexteriormirrors draws your attention to vehiclesdetected in the monitored area. If you thenswitch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lanes, you will also receive an opticaland audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assistuses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.


Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles driving at the inneredge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice orslush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racks

or overhanging loads. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the sensors checked at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist mayotherwise not work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Indicator lamp (yellow)Warning lamp (red)

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysemitted when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs if the difference in speed is less than7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assistis no longer active.The brightness of the indicator or warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to the ambi-ent light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 198) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

LaneKeepingAssistmonitors the area in front ofyour vehicle with camera:, which is mountedat the top of thewindshield. Active LaneKeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. LaneKeeping Assist cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-ing in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-cle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or mergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 198).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display


(Y page 196) are shown in green. Lane Keep-ing Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-tain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-tain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package consistsof DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153), Active BlindSpot Assist (Y page 183) and Active Lane Keep-ing Assist (Y page 186).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,to monitor the area to the sides of the vehiclewhich the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-play in the exterior mirrors draws your attentionto vehicles detected in the monitored area. Ifyou then switch on the corresponding turn sig-nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti-cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-sion is detected, corrective braking may helpyou avoid a collision. Before a course-correctingbrake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-uates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-sors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is nota substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpers andbehind a cover in the radiator trim. Make surethat the bumpers and the cover in the radiatorgrill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensorsmust not be covered, for example by cycle racksor overhanging cargo. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers, havethe function of the radar sensors checked at aqualified specialist workshop. Active Blind SpotAssist may otherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or sprayVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated or indicated with a delay.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if there are vehicles at the edge of theirlane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.


Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-cated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-cator lamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicatorlamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the correspond-ing side lights up red. This warning is alwaysgiven when a vehicle enters the blind spot mon-itoring range frombehind or from the side.Whenyou overtake a vehicle, the warning only occursif the difference in speed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is notoperational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-roundings.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to change lanesand a vehicle is detected in the side monitoringrange, you receive a visual and acoustic collisionwarning. You then hear a double warning toneand red warning lamp: flashes. If the turn sig-nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicatedby the flashing of redwarning lamp:. There areno further warning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. Thisis meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake application occurs,red warning lamp: flashes in the exterior mir-ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,display; appears in the multifunction displayunderlining the danger of a side collision.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. An inappropri-ate course-correcting brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly in theopposite direction or accelerate, for example.The course-correcting brake application is avail-able in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-cor-recting brake application adapted to the drivingsituation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®or PRE-SAFE® Brake.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 198) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of multifunctioncamera: at the top of the windshield. Variousdifferent areas to the front, rear and side of yourvehicle are also monitored with the aid of theradar sensor system. Active Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andcan warn you before you leave your lane unin-tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, alane-correcting application of the brakes canbring the vehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in the range between40mph and 120mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system must beoperational

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, Active LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics. ActiveLane Keeping Assist cannot take account ofroad and weather conditions. It may not recog-

nize traffic situations. Active Lane KeepingAssist is only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuouslykeep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired ormay not functionif:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficientillumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, thesun or reflections (e.g. when the road surfaceis wet)Rthewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-ity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpersor the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured bysnowRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkingsfor a lane, e.g. in areas with road constructionworkRthe lanemarkings are worn away, dark or cov-ered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is too smalland the lane markings thus cannot be detec-tedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanesbranch off, cross one another or merge


Rthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane andbroken lanemarkings are detected, no lane-cor-recting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheel passesover a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel forup to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-fic conditions or road users to a limitedextent. In very rare cases, the system maymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g.after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.This ismeant to assist you in bringing the vehicleback to the original lane.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction display.

A lane-correcting brake application can bemadeafter driving over a lane marking recognize asbeing solid or broken. Before this, a warningmust be given bymeans of intermittent vibrationin the steering wheel. In addition, a lane withlane markings on both sides must be recog-nized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detectedin the adjacent lane. The following vehicles canhave an influence on brake application: oncom-ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applicationcan only occur after your vehicle has returnedto the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-erate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style withhigh cornering speeds or high rates of accel-eration.Ryou have switched on the turn signal.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are driving.Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tirehas been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-uation. An inappropriate brake application maybe interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Rswitch on the turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-ted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®,PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandard or Adaptive (Y page 198).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 196) are shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If Standard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

When Adaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signal. In thisevent, the warnings are suppressed for acertain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when neces-sary and in good time if you cross the lanemark-ing, the system recognizes certain conditionsand warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.



G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 151):The segments light up from the stored speedto the type-tested maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 153):

One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 191).The multifunction display shows changes in theoutside temperature with a delay.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in the instru-ment cluster on the left-hand side (Y page 33).

Displays and operation 189

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on voice-operated navigation or

the Voice Control System= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-tem: you can find further information on theVoice Control System in the separate operat-ing instructions.Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys-tem: you can find further information onvoice-operated navigation in the manufactur-er's operating instructions.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range, or anaudio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialing the selected number

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

190 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off voice-operated navi-gation or the Voice Control SystemRHides display messages or calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program? Transmission positionA Permanent display: outside temperature or

speedX To display menu bar;: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar; is faded out after a few seconds.Text field: shows the selectedmenu or sub-menu as well as display messages.

Possible displays in the multifunction dis-play:RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shiftingmanually (Y page 138)Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 166)RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 151)R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist(Y page 112)

R¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 131)Rë HOLD function (Y page 162)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steeringwheel to call up themenu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 190).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 191)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 193)RAudio menu (Y page 194)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 195)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 196)RServ. menu (Y page 198)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 198)The displays are controlled by the multimediasystem. For this reason, the displays for theAudio, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightlyto those in your vehicle.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Menus and submenus 191

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 192).In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-matically reset From Start:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have beenexceeded, the trip computer is automaticallyreset From Reset.ECO displayX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select ECODISPLAY.If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For more information on the ECO display, see(Y page 147).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press9 or: to select the display withapproximate range and the current fuel con-sumption.The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-eledC appears instead of approximaterange.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.A gearshift recommendation Z can alsoappear in the display.Observe the information on gearshift recom-mendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 138).

Resetting valuesX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa to confirm your selection.X Press: to select Yes and pressa toconfirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

192 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From Start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From Start" trip computer, the values in theECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Observe the additional information on naviga-tion in the separate operating instructions of themultimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicatorshortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes of direc-tion without changing lane.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additional infor-mation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating RouteA new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigitalmap but the road is not recognized, e.g.newly built streets, car parks or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe menu shows station; with station fre-quency or station name. The preset position isonly displayed along with station; if this hasbeen stored.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectRadio (see the separate operating instruc-tions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a preset list or station list: pressand briefly hold the9 or: button until

the preset list or station list in the desiredfrequency range is shown.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on radio operation, see"Satellite radio" in the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode (see the separateoperating instructions).


X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track: appears.If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation


-board

computerand

displays

Only for vehicles with COMAND: you can use theAudio menu to operate video DVDs.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectvideo DVD (see the separate operatinginstructions).


X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene:appears.

Telephone menu

Introduction


When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-rate operating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system (see the separate operatinginstructions).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheelto reject or end a call.

Selecting an entry in the phone bookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold:or9 for longer than one second.The names in the phone book are displayedquickly one after the other.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 196)RDeactivating/activating ESP® (Y page 196)RActivating/deactivating Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 197)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist orActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 198)RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assistor Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 198)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select Assist.Graphic.X Pressa to confirm.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the statusand further information on the following driv-ing systems or driving safety systems:RTraffic Sign Assist (Y page 179)RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 64)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 177)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 182)RActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 186)

X Press: to display the ATTENTION ASSISTassessment.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the important safety notes on ESP®(Y page 67).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel


-board

computerand

displays

For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 66).X Start the engine.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select ESP.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up continuouslywhen the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warninglamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availabledue to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 227).Observe the information on display messages(Y page 203).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select PRE-SAFE Brake.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbol inthe multifunction display.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see(Y page 69).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select Col‐lision Prevent..

X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheæ symbol in the multifunction display.

For further information about COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 64).

Activating/deactivating SteeringAssist and Stop&Go PilotX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select DTR+: Steer. Asst.X Pressa to confirm.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot areactivated, themultifunction display shows theDTR+: Steer. Asst. On message.

Further information about DISTRONIC PLUSwith Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(Y page 160).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention Assist.X Pressa to confirm your selection.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Sensitive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in themultifunction dis-play in the assistance graphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 177).


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 180).For further information about Active Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 183).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. Assist.X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set Off,Standard or Adaptive.X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, the multifunctiondisplay shows the lane markings as brightlines in the assistance graphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 182).For further information about Active Lane Keep-ing Assist, see (Y page 186).

Service menuDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ. menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 202)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 291)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 261)

Settings menu

IntroductionDepending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theSett. menu:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 198)RChanging the light settings (Y page 199)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 200)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 200)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 201)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.You will see the selected setting: km or miles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting permanent displayThe Permanent Display: function allows youto choose whether the multifunction displayalways shows the outside temperature or thespeed.The speed display is inverse to the speedome-ter.


-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.The current setting, Outside Temperatureor Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer[mph], appears.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Setting the brightness of the instrumentcluster lighting and switchesThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-plays and the controls in the vehicle interior canbe adjusted with the Brightness Display/Switches: function.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches: function.The current setting appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Level 1 toLevel 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.If the light switch is set to theÃ, T orL position, the brightness is dependentupon the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theDay. Run. Lights function.If the Day. Run. Lights function has beenswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe cone of light and theW symbol inorange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 109).

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Using: or9, select the SurroundLighting function.If the Surround Lighting function is activa-ted, the light cone and the area around thevehicle are displayed in orange in the multi-function display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exteriorlighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start the engine.If you have activated the Surround Lightingfunction and the light switch is set to theÃposition, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 109).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close allthe doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light-ing goes off after 15 seconds.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow-ing light up:RParking lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Light. Delay function, theinterior lighting remains on for 20 seconds afteryou remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. Delay function.When the Light. Delay function is activa-ted, the vehicle interior is displayed in orangein the multifunction display.


Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Door Locks function.If the Auto. Door Locks function is switchedon, the multifunction display shows the vehi-cle's doors in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.If you activate the Auto. Door Locks function,the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed ofaround 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 79).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up orange.


Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.


-board

computera

nddisplays

X Using: or9, select the Easy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the vehicle steering wheel is displayed inorange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 104).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt Adjustment function is acti-vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment, see(Y page 45).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only availablewhen the vehicle isequipped with the electrical fold-in function.When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded inwhen the vehicle is locked. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Settings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction display showsthe vehicle's exterior mirror in orange.


If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors by pressing button:, the exterior mir-rors will not fold out automatically (Y page 106).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? functionappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes and confirmed, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Day Lights function inthe Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicleis stationary.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manualand may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-prioritydisplay messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, thecorresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 162)RParking (Y page 144)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel.The multifunction display hides the display message.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority displaymessages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messageshave been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in themessage memory. You can call upthe display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

202 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z


÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

T!÷Inoperative SeeOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.


-board

computerand

displays


$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐tion Assist PlusInoperativeCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative dueto a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEInoperative SeeOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


PRE-SAFEFunctions CurrentlyLimited See Opera‐tor's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


PRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedSee Operator's Man‐ual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays


Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualAt least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systemsis temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRPRE-SAFE® PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist willnot perform a course-correcting brake application.Possible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirtyRthe function of the driving system or driving safety system isimpaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operativeagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 267):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

AMalfunction ServiceRequired

G Risk of injuryCabriolet: the roll bars are defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up inthe instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 40).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorRearRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired

There is amalfunction in the left-hand or right-handwindow curtain airbag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet).The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag (Coupe) or head bag (Cabriolet)may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident,may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays


Front Passenger Air‐bag DisabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seatIf additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpretthe occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-neously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-tifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).

Front Passenger Air‐bag EnabledSee Operator's Man‐ual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system'sweight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe systemmay detect objects or forces applying additional weight onthe seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the centerconsole and the multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF andPASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultane-ously for approximately six secondsRthe PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lampmust then light up andremain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCShas disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Man‐ual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator'sManual display messages must not be shown in the multifunctiondisplay

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary systemchecks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-function display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).


-board

computerand

displays

Lights


bCheck Left Low Beam(example)

The corresponding bulb is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 113).

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bActive HeadlampsInoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tonealso sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Availablemessage is displayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAssist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine


+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 259).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).


-board

computera

nddisplays


#See Operator's Man‐ual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Stop Vehicle SeeOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level istoo low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Observe the instructions in the# See Operator's Manualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 258).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 259).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if youneed to add engine oil more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


ÀAttention Assist:Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue ora lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone alsosounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Traffic Sign AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.

Traffic Sign AssistInoperative Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 162).


-board

computerand

displays


The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 162).

Lane Keeping AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActive LaneKeeping Assist Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated andtemporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping AssistInoperativeorActiveLane Keeping AssistInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManualorActiveBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.



On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Blind Spot AssistInoperativeorActiveBlind Spot AssistInoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-tened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched themultifunction steeringwheel whilesteering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 166).

Park Assist Inoper‐ative You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-vers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximatelyten minutes (Y page 166).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Finished The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 153)

DISTRONIC PLUS NowAvailable DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153).


-board

computerand

displays


DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐rently UnavailableSee Operator's Man‐ual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.


DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐erative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 153).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


DTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display messagedisappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringAssist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Inop‐erative Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 151).

Cruise Control Off Cruise control has been deactivated.If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-matically (Y page 151).


-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

CorrectTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 291).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 293).

CheckTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 270).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 291).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

WarningTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flattire (Y page 270).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐ble

Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine:

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

To Shift from 'P'Apply Brake

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

To Deselect P or N,Depress Brake andStart Engine

With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.X Depress the brake pedal.X Start the engine.


-board

computerand

displays


Risk of Rolling AwayVehicle Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is inposition R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Close the driver's door completely.

Only Shiftto 'P' when Vehicleis Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.

Service Required DoNot Shift GearsVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-mission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Reversing Not Poss.Service Required

You cannot shift into the transmission positionR due to amalfunction.The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission Mal‐function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-nents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-tion N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch offthe engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_Rear Left BackrestNot LatchedorRearRight Backrest NotLatched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

_Lock Seat BackrestFront LeftorLockSeat Backrest FrontRight

The driver's or front passenger's seat backrest is not engaged. Awarning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

ÐPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

JTrunk Partition Open

Cabriolet: the trunk partition is open.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 91).


-board

computerand

displays


KConvertible TopOperation Possibleto 25 mph

If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannotopen or close the soft top.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 86).

KConvertible Top Low‐ering

The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres-surized.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 86).

KOpen/Close Conver‐tible Top Completely

The roof is not locked.If you drive at speeds of more than 25 mph (40 km/h), you cannotopen or close the soft top.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Push or pull and hold the soft-top switch until the soft top is fullyopen or closed (Y page 86).

KStart Engine SeeOperator's Manual

The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row. Thesoft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 86).

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 260).

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


ÂReplace Key Battery

The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 76).

ÂDon't Forget YourKey

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. You have opened thedriver's door with the engine switched off.This display message is shown in the multifunction display for a max-imum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leavethe vehicle.

ÂKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-trally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this ispreventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when theengine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.

ÂKey Not Detected(white display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO func-tions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemove 'Start' But‐ton and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warningtone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicatorand warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator

224 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine orwhilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 43).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems



$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp islit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.The braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.


-board

computerand

displays



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

$J÷å!

N$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only): the red brake systemwarning lamp andthe yellow ESP®, ESP® OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine isrunning.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or the traction control system has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67).

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. ActiveBlind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-tions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 67), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 67).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked.


-board

computera

nddisplays



÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 40).


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Engine



; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop assoon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legalrequirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legalregulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 259).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warningtone also sounds.The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engineradiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 259).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z



X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 69).Observe the additional information on the distancewarning function of COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 64).


-board

computera

nddisplays

Tires


N Signal typePossible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale forthe TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 144).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 270).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 291).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this manualdescribes the basic principles for operation.More information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it isdesirable that it should be installed and oper-ated with at least 8 inches (20cm) and morebetween the radiator and a person's body(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet andlegs.)

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

234 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the q control knob.The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during a phone call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the control panel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switch

themedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemCOMAND: navigation via the hard driveAudio 20: navigation via SD cardRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS Weather (COMAND)RVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Operating system 235

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theò button on the con-troller.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theò button again.

Adding favorites

Adding a predefined favorite

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theò button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoriteX Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theò button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN®MAP PILOT(see themanufacturer's operating instructions).The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructionsare stored on the SDmemory card as a PDF file.The SD card box contains a quick guide.The following descriptions apply to navigationwith COMAND. Further information can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic Route (only available inthe USA and Canada)Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account.

236 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

RDynamic TRF. Route After Request (onlyavailable in the USA and Canada)You can decide whether or not current trafficreports should be taken into account for routecalculation.RCalculate Alternative RoutesDifferent routes are being calculated. In orderto do so, instead of Start, select the menuitem Continue.

Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:(only available in the USA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRstate/province, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide the5 control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the zip code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keywordThe keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐tination.Yes cancels the current route guidance andstarts route calculation to the new destina-tion.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

PrerequisitesFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRText messages and e-mails

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be obtained on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA you can also contact theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing a mobilephoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particular

security settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phoneMultimedia system:X Select Tel/®QConnectDeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey:X Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,

238 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take upto two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Connect Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)RCDRDVD (COMAND Online)RSD cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVDchanger (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing anSDmemory card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSDmemory cards are small parts. They can beswallowed and cause asphyxiation. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Keep SD memory cards out of the reach ofchildren. If an SD memory card is swallowed,seek immediate medical attention.

! If you are no longer using the SD memorycard, you should remove it and take it out ofthe vehicle. High temperatures can damagethe card.

Inserting an SD memory cardThe SD card slot is on the control panel.X Insert the SD memory card into the SD cardslot until it engages. The side with the con-tacts must face downwards.

Ejecting an SD memory cardX Press the memory card.The memory card is ejected.

X Remove the memory card.

Connecting USB devicesThere are two USB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.X Connect the USB device to the USB port.X Select the media source (Y page 239).


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.


G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehicleare dependent on the distribution of the loadwithin the vehicle. For this reason, you shouldobserve the following notes when transporting aload:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicle iden-

tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver'sdoor.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.RThe load must not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear or frontseat backrests. Make sure that the seatbackrests are securely locked into place.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-rials appropriate for the weight and size of theload.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges forprotection.

Stowage spaces


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Inaddition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240).

240 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.

i The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 126).

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise toposition1.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X Briefly press trim; in the direction of thearrow.Cover: swings upwards.

Stowage compartment under the arm-rest

X To open: press left-hand button; or right-hand button:.The stowage compartment opens.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-lowing may be in the stowage compartment: amultimedia connector unit with an SD card slotand 2 USB ports (Media Interface), e.g. for usewith an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player; see theseparate operating instructions.

Stowage compartment under the frontseats

G WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicle

Stowage areas 241

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stowagecompartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

X To open: pull handle: up and fold cover;forwards.

Stowage netsStowage nets are located in the front-passengerfootwell and on the left and right-hand sides ofthe trunk.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 240)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 240).

Through-loading facility in the rear

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X Pull handle: and fold cover; downwards.


Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesObserve the following notes on securing loads:RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 240).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

Cargo tie-down rings:

Bag hook

G WARNINGThe bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objectsor items of luggage. Objects or items of lug-gage could be flung around and thereby hitvehicle occupants when braking or abruptlychanging directions. There is a risk of injury.Only hang light objects on the bag hooks.Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragileobjects on the bag hooks.

242 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to securea load.

: Bag hook

Stowage well under the trunk floor! Unhook the handle before again before clos-ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-wise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In

addition, cupholders, open stowage spacesand mobile phone brackets cannot alwaysretain all objects they contain. There is a riskof injury, particularly in the event of suddenbraking or a sudden change in direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces beforestarting a journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.


Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holderYou can remove the cup holder's rubber mat forcleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarmwater only.

Features 243

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Cup holder in the rear stowage box

X To open: slide front cup holder cover; andrear cup holder cover: in the direction ofthe arrows.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visor isclipped into bracket; and mirror coverA hasbeen folded up.

Glare from the side

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction ofthe arrow.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray is notheat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes inthe ashtray, make sure that the ashtray isproperly engaged. Otherwise, the stowagespace could be damaged.

X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 241).

X To remove the insert: grip recesses; andlift insert= up and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert= intothe holder until it engages.

X To close: press stowage compartmentcover: down until it engages.

244 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

You can remove the ashtray insert and use theresulting compartment for stowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: press release but-ton= and lift the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down into theholder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter


G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attention must always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighterwhen road and traffic conditions permit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment


X To open: open the stowage compartment(Y page 241).

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter;will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: press stowage compartmentcover: down until it engages.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessoriesinclude such items as chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-ets is automatically cut. This ensures that thereis sufficient power to start the engine.

Features 245

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To log in, press theï MB Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the volume control on the multimediasystem.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosisof the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe Inoperative or the Service NotActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diagno-sis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearest author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-lowing service hotlines:

246 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 246).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.

All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

Features 247

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing the SOS button, you will not knowwhether mbrace placed the emergency call. Inthis case, always summon assistance by othermeans.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.

From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 251).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: pressMB Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears in

248 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

the multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp inMB Info call button ïis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.

The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location ofPoints of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.

Features 249

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You can use the route assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.

A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

250 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.The Roadside Assistance Connected mes-sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle HealthCheck can be started, the Request for Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐cle diagnostics? message appears in thedisplay.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 128).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐cle Diagnostics Active message.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-

Features 251

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 29).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 26).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the External desti‐nation ICON_POI_Category Name_1 hasbeen saved to "Previous destina‐tions". Would you like to start navi‐gation? message on the multimedia systemdisplay.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Starting route guidance.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.You can find further information in the separatemultimedia system operating instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-

tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include text message, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notesThe HomeLink® garage door opener integratedin the rear-view mirror allows you to operate upto three different door and gate systems.

252 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Use the integrated garage door opener only ongarage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operating instruc-tions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garagedoor opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 27).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 253).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soon asbutton;,= or? is stored for the first time.If the selected button has already been pro-grammed, indicator lamp: will only light upyellow after ten seconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towards but-tons; to? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.

Features 253

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code (Y page 254).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 253).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiatethe next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly and in quick succession until thedoor closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated garage door opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparablewith Canadian law, someU.S. garage door open-ers also feature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remote con-trolA for two seconds, then release it for twoseconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB of remotecontrolA until indicator lamp: lights upgreen.When indicator lamp: lights up green: pro-gramming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step is tosynchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA of thegarage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspondingbutton on the rear-view mirror. When doingso, vary the distance between remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least25 seconds before trying another position.

254 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instruc-tions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofthe garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the likelihood thatgarage door remote controlA will transmit astrong and precise signal to the integratedgarage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from the but-ton which you are programming. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and 12 inches(5to 30 cm) or at the sameangle but at varyingdistances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the same pro-gramming steps with this remote control.Before performing these steps, make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function of thegarage door system remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.

Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-cator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal as longas the button is pressed. The transmission ishalted after a maximum of ten seconds andindicator lamp: lights up yellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

Features 255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the footwell.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers;.X Remove the floormat.

256 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation area

Rremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 257

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle;up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may

be higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait about 30minutes before carryingout the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick


X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

258 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Adding engine oil


G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engineoil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick(Y page 258).

Further information on engine oil (Y page 315).

Additional service products

Checking coolant level


G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.

Engine compartment 259

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 128).

X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).


X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise to allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhenwarm, there is enough coolant in expan-sion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 316).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.

Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appearsin the multifunction display prompting you toadd washer fluid (Y page 223).Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 316).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).

260 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on the engineoil level. Observe the notes on the engine oillevel (Y page 258).

The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. daysRService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance until thenext service due date is displayed.The letter A or B, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the type ofservice. A stands for a minor service and B for amajor service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval display doesnot take into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Note down the service due date displayed inthe multifunction display before disconnect-ing the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by press-ing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-val display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval displayhas been inadvertently reset, this setting canbe corrected at a qualified specialist work-shop.Have service work carried out as described intheMaintenance Booklet. This may otherwiselead to increased wear and damage to themajor assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset theASSYST PLUS service interval display after theservice work has been carried out. You can alsoobtain further information on maintenancework, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAn extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network isalso available in other countries. You can obtainfurther information from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Maintenance 261

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.


! Preferably use automatic car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. Thiscorresponds with the specification for theCabriolet program. In car washes that usehigh water pressures, there is a risk that asmall amount of water may leak into the vehi-cle.

! Make sure that the vehicle is not subse-quently treated with hot wax.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof orsoft top are fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (theOFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position 0.Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmission isin transmission position N, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock. Do not open the driver's door orfront-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels. You canprevent this by shifting the automatic trans-mission to N beforehand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatictransmission selects park position P auto-matically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:

262 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 128).Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damage

to the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, joints etc.RSoft topRWind deflector netRElectrical componentsRBatteryRConnectorsRLightsRSealsRTrim elementsRVentilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

Care 263

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,mottled areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the soft top! Never use any of the following to clean thesoft top:RgasolineRthinnerRtar or stain removerRother organic solvents

! Remove bird droppings immediately as theyare corrosive and, therefore, can make thesoft-top fabric leak. Do not use high-pressurecleaning equipment to clean the vehicle. Donot use sharp-edged equipment to remove iceand snow.

X Light soiling: you can clean the soft topwhileit is dry or rinse it with clear water.

X Normal to heavy soiling: clean the soft topwith a brush and clear water. Clean stains andother dirt with a brush and soft top cleaningagents that have been recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. Always brushfrom front to back, following the grain of thefabric.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top's resist-ance to dirt.To restore this resistance to dirt, clean the softtop using soft top cleaning agents that havebeen recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Have thesoft-top seams sealed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i Cover the soft top appropriately if you planto leave the vehicle outside for a long periodof time.

264 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning AIRCAP

Cleaning the wind deflector! Do not use high-pressure cleaning equip-ment to clean the net.

Clean the wind deflector on the windshield withthe soft top closed.X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the SmartKeyto position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128).

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 128).

X Open the cover in the lower center console.The AIRCAP button is under the cover.

X Press AIRCAP button:.The wind deflector between the windshieldand the soft top is extended.

X Clean net; of the wind deflector with a softbrush or a moist cloth. For heavier soiling,clean it with the care and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz and rinse it with clean water.

Cleaning the AIRCAP wind screenClean the AIRCAP wind screen with the soft topopen.X Vehicles with SmartKey: turn the SmartKeyto position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 128).

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 128).

X Open the soft top (Y page 86).

X Press rear seat head restraints button:.The rear seat head restraints and AIRCAPwind screen rise upwards.

X Clean net; of the AIRCAP wind screen witha moist cloth together with the care andcleaning agents recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.

Care 265

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

266 CareMaintenance

andcare

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 267

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum and canlose their shine if chrome polish is used. Usea damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you areunsure as to whether the trim pieces arechrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

i Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

268 CareMaintenance

andcare

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 269

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowagewell under the trunk floor (Y page 243).

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel; Vehicle tool kit tray= Stowage wellX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 243).The vehicle tool kit contains:RStraps for emergency release of the Cabrioletsoft topRFolding wheel chockRFuse allocation chartRJackRAlignment boltROne pair of glovesRLug wrenchRTowing eye

i Example: equipment and country-specificvariations possible.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-ties) (Y page 270)

Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-cles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 270)Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 308)Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.Information on changing and mounting wheels(Y page 303).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 144).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.


X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires. The affected tire must not showany clearly visible damage.

270 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bear-ing capacity and the speed index (Y page 298).MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure monitor.If a pressure losswarningmessage appearsin the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the display mes-sages (Y page 219).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fullyladen it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving conditionsor maneuvers, or it can be increased through amoderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat mode iscounted from the moment the tire pressure losswarning appears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, please observethe following specifications for your vehicle'stires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may beused as a temporary measure. Make sure thatyou use the proper size and type (summer orwinter tire).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.


G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-tures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Flat tire 271

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressorfor longer than eightminutes at a timewithouta break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be operatedagain once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-pressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Donot remove any foreign objectswhich havepenetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation

compressor from the stowage well under-neath the trunk floor (Y page 270).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's field ofvision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull connector? with the cable and hoseAout of the tire inflation compressor housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire sealantbottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head downwardsinto recess; of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 245) in your vehicle.


X Press on and off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switched on.The tire is inflated.

272 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximumof fiveminutes. The tire should thenhave attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-sure reached" (Y page 273).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure not reached" (Y page 273).If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affectedareas as quickly as possible. Use plain water ifpossible.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, havethem cleaned with perchloroethylene at a drycleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has notbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.Note that tire sealant may escape when youunscrew the filler hose.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-imately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part ofthe TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-ment cluster in the driver's field of vision.

! After use, excess tire sealant may run out ofthe filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle withfiller hose in the plastic bag which is con-tained in the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of thefaulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-tion compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure with thetire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.

Flat tire 273

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentioned above,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch on thetire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-sure release buttonEnext to pressure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew thefiller hose from the valve of the sealed tire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of thesealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-tion compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-shop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hosereplaced as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS (Y page 62)and ESP® (Y page 66).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.

274 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. They

must be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.Rswitch off the ignition.Ralways disconnect the negative terminalclamp first, followed by the positive termi-nal clamp.

After the battery has been disconnected, thetransmission is locked in position P.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contactwith skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.

Battery (vehicle) 275

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physicianif necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. ifyou reconnect the battery, you will have to:Rset the clock. Information on setting the clockcan be found in the Digital Operator's ManualOn vehicles with a multimedia system, thetime is set automatically.Rreset the function for folding the exterior mir-rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-rors out once (Y page 106)

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 278).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 278).

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up atlow temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-charged battery has frozen. In this case, youmay neither charge the battery nor jump-startthe vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out bat-terymay be shorter. The starting characteristicsmay be impaired, especially at low tempera-

276 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

tures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.Never charge a battery still installed in the vehi-cle unless a battery charger unit approved byMercedes-Benz is being used . A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.

Battery (vehicle) 277

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge thebattery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

278 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it(Y page 128).

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryB using thejumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

Jump-starting 279

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive clamp; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 311).

! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or theHOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automaticallyin certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivatethese systems in the following or similar sit-uations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could bedamaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recoverthe vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button.Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock and shift the automatic transmission toN. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 andleave it in the ignition lock.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.

280 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,have it transported on a transporter or trailer.The automatic transmission must be in positionN when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

In the event of damage to the electrical sys-temIf the battery is defective, the automatic trans-mission will be locked in position P. To shift theautomatic transmission to position N, you mustprovide power to the vehicle's electrical systemin the same way as when jump-starting(Y page 278).Have the vehicle transported on a transporter ortrailer.Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 79). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

The mountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at the rearand at the front, under covers:.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 270).

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as itwill go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position cover: on top of the bumper andpress it in at the bottom until it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 280).X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

Towing and tow-starting 281

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resettingthe combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised, asdoing so will damage the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be towed with the rear axle raised. Thevehicle/trailer combination may otherwiseswerve or even roll over.

Transporting the vehicle

Vehicles with automatic transmission

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-poses.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be started by tow-starting. This could oth-erwise damage the transmission.i You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 278).

Fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicletool kit in the stowage compartment under thetrunk floor (Y page 270).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-

282 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.

Before changing a fusePay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 282).X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 144).

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.


All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboardRFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed inthe direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side ofthe vehicle, when viewed in the direction oftravel

Dashboard fuse boxPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 282).

! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

X To open: pull out cover: slightly at the bot-tom in the direction of arrow=.

X Pull cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow; and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartmentPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 282).

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

Fuses 283

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood (Y page 257).X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture fromthe fuse box.

X To open: remove lines; from the guides.X Move lines; aside. Route the lines behindconnection= to do this.

X Open clamp:.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-rectly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box intothe retainer.

X Fold down cover and close clamps:.X Secure lines; in the guides.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunkPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 282).

X Open the trunk lid.X To open: raise trunk floor: (Y page 243).X Slightly push back floor covering with slits;at gap= and lift it up.

284 FusesBreakdow

nassistance


G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

Further information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 307).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 294)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 142)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 288)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheelsor tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Operation 285

Wheelsandtires

Z

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particularattention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 286). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not mountanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or other valve caps approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use anyother valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressuremonitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 288).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 308).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.

Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 270).ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). They only reach theirfull performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 308).

286 OperationWheelsandtires

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in oneor more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-tion with an active tire pressure monitor andonly on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with aflat tire (Y page 270).Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 303).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.Once the winter tires are mounted:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 291).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 291).

For more information on driving with the emer-gency spare wheel, see (Y page 308).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

Winter operation 287

Wheelsandtires

Z

! Onsome tire sizes there is not enough spacefor snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-binations" section under "Tires and wheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mountsnow chains on steel wheels, you may dam-age the hub caps. Remove the hub caps fromthe relevant wheels before mounting thesnow chains.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 307).ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i Youmay wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed(Y page 196). You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach-ieving an increased driving force (cuttingaction).

For more information on driving with the emer-gency spare wheel, see (Y page 308).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with an emergency spare wheel:information on operation with an emergencyspare wheel can be found in the general notes inthe "Emergency spare wheel" section(Y page 308).Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

288 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 294).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-lowing tire pressure information is only valid forthat tire size; see illustration (example).

The load conditions "partially laden" and "fullyladen" are defined in the table for different num-bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. Theactual number of seats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can befound on the tire sidewall (Y page 298).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire pressure 289

Wheelsandtires

Z

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is

too low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap(Y page 142)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.


Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 288).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 288).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 142)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 288).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the Servicemenu of themultifunctiondisplay, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, refer tothe "Checking the tire pressure electronically"section (Y page 293).

Tire pressure 291

Wheelsandtires

Z


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.

When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 288). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 293). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 288).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss or a malfunction. Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.


In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 219).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-sure warning lamp flashing for approximatelyone minute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 128).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, thesystem may continue to show the tire pressure

of the wheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-played for the position where the spare wheel ismounted is not the same as the current tirepressure of the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowtire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Correct Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire is too low. The tirepressure must be corrected when the oppor-tunity arises.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in oneor more tires has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire Malfunctionmessageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in one or more tires is dropping sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes in thedisplay messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 219).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence valuesmanually as described here. The tirepressure monitor then monitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 288).

Tire pressure 293

Wheelsandtires

Z

You can find more tire pressure values forvarious operating conditions in the tire pres-sure table inside the fuel filler flap(Y page 288).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Service menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for the individual tires or theTire pressures will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Never exceedthe maximum load or the maximum grossaxle weight rating for the front or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

294 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combinedweight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, loadand luggage must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specificand may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle onthe Tire and Loading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-

suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 295

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 294).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2


Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3


Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

296 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargo care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 294).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-

sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.

All about wheels and tires 297

Wheelsandtires

Z

You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 286). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 287).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 301)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-cation Number (Y page 301)

= Maximum load rating (Y page 300)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 291)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 301)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 298)D Load index (Y page 300)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe the

298 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

tire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wall maynot contain any letters or may contain one letterthat precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-ufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: these arelight truck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressure thatare only designed for temporary use in an emer-gency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculatedby dividing the tire width by the tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-onal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim

flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA is anumerical code that specifies the maximumload-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 294).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 300).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 300).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).RIf a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speed


Wheelsandtires

Z

rating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating. The maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).If the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-cle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 307).

Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex:may be imprinted after the letters thatidentify speed indexB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 298).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure


Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissible

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.


load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 294).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-ufacturer or retreadermust imprint a TIN in or onthe sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retreadersto inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol:marks that the tire complies with therequirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-portation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 307).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four represent

the year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "2614" wasmanufactured in week 26in 2014.


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the number oflayers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire treadand sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturer


Wheelsandtires

Z

following specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,

fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.


tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire's surface.The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 270) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flattire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" (Y page 270).Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in theevent of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel ismounted as described under "Mounting awheel" (Y page 304).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.

Changing a wheel 303

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 304).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this maybe required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate thetire pressure monitor if necessary (Y page 293).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. These advantages can only be gained ifthe tires are installed corresponding to thedirection of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStore wheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tiresfrom oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the SmartKey having beenremoved.


X If included in the vehicle equipment, removethe tire-change tool kit from the vehicle(Y page 270).

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, itcan be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 270).The folding wheel chock is an additional safetymeasure to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway, for example when changing a wheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into theopenings in base plate=.

304 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.

RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of the rearwheel housings (arrows).Vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect thevehicle body, the vehicle has covers next to thejacking points on the outer sills.

Changing a wheel 305

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: foldcover; upwards.

X Position jack? at jacking point=.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankA clockwise until jack? sitscompletely on jacking point=. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankA until the tire is raised a maxi-mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 303).

306 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-ment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwiseuntil the vehicle is once again standing firmlyon the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle toolsin the trunk again.

X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert thecover into the outer sill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly mountedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 288).

All wheelsmountedmust be equippedwith func-tioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel-tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires and wheelswhich have been approved byMercedes-Benzspecifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABS orESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires mayonly be used on wheels that have been spe-cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Wheel and tire combinations 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 288).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equipthe vehicle with:Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (leftand right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summertires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics" section (Y page 270).

Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Itis therefore recommended that you additionallyequip your vehiclewith a TIREFIT kit if youmounttires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.

winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained froma qualified specialist workshop.

Emergency spare wheel


G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or sparewheel of a different size, you must not exceedthe maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesYou can ask for information regarding permittedemergency spare wheels at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.You should regularly check the pressure of theemergency spare wheel, particularly prior tolong trips, and correct the pressure as neces-sary (Y page 288). The value on the wheel isvalid.An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-ted against the direction of rotation. Observethe time restriction on use as well as the speed

308 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

limitation specified on the emergency sparewheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the emergencyspare wheel mounted, the tire pressure mon-itor cannot function reliably. Only restart thetire pressure monitor when the defectivewheel has been replaced with a new wheel.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, thesystem may continue to show the tire pres-sure of the wheel that has been removed for afew minutes. The value displayed for themounted emergency spare wheel is not thesame as the current tire pressure of the emer-gency spare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

: "Minispare" emergency spare wheel; Vehicle tool kit tray= Stowage wellThe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can befound in the stowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 243).X Remove vehicle tool kit tray;.X Turn stowage well= counter-clockwise andremove it.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel:.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 304).

Emergency spare wheel 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissibleoutput in these wavebands is required.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be used ifRF transmitters have been properly installed:

Approved antenna positions: Rear fender

i On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of the vehicleclosest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe themanufacturer's addi-tional instructions when installing.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna positionsmust be approved by Mercedes-Benz.Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the valuesin the following table:

310 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

30 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

15 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

25 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

15 W

Mobile communications(3G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following wave-bands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the left door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

Identification plates 311

Technicaldata

Z

from the data shown here. You can find thedata applicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmostposition.

X Slightly raise front floor covering= and foldfloor covering flap: upwards.You will see VIN;.

Engine number

: Emission control information plate, includ-ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and filling capaci-ties


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommended byMercedes-Benz. Damagewhich is caused by theuse of products which have not been recom-mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benzwarranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed inthis Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in theappropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

312 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Total capa-city

All models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to enginefailure.

! Do not use the following:RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-

Service products and filling capacities 313

Technicaldata

Z

mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 142).

Additivesi In some countries, the available gasolinemay not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This fuelcan temporarily produce unpleasant odors,especially on short journeys. As soon as sul-fur-free fuel (sulfur content < 10 ppm) is usedfor refueling, the odors are reduced.

Flexible Fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-gradeunleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized bythe Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less than thatof the same amount of premium-grade gasoline.The amount of fuel consumed when operatingthe vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher thanwith premium-grade gasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerthat you are operating or have operated thevehicle with E85 fuel.

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †),the starting procedure can take noticeably lon-ger when operating with E85 fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside tem-peratures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).


Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 312).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.You should therefore only use engine oils and oilfilters that are approved for vehicles with main-tenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

i MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-ers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

E 400 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

E 550 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes for ser-vice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 312).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Service products and filling capacities 315

Technicaldata

Z

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 312).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolantduring operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).

The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

E 550 Approx. 11.5 US qt(10.9 l)

All other models Approx. 10.9 US qt(10.3 l)

Windshield washer system


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionised water, other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.


When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 312).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerant orreplacing components, may only be carried outby a qualified specialist workshop. All applicableregulations must be adhered to, SAE standardJ639 included.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacities

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 ± 0.4 oz(120 ± 10 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Vehicle data 317

Technicaldata

Z

Dimensions and weights

Model : Opening height

E 400 60.7 in(1541 mm)

E 550 60.6 in(1538 mm)

All models

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.4 in (2016 mm)

Vehicle height 55.0 in (1398 mm)

Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)

Vehicle height,when opening/clos-ing the roof

80.5 in (2045 mm)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model Vehicle length

E 550 186.9 in (4746 mm)

All other models 185.2 in (4703 mm)

Model Turning radius

E 400 36.6 ft (11.15 m)

E 550 36.7 ft (11.19 m)

318 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

e-class - mercedes-benz usa · 2021. 3. 12. · e-class cabriolet operator'smanual...

Documents